Pioneer Stereo Receiver VSX 1018AH K 7 User Manual
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL  
RECEIVER  
VSX-1018AH-K  
Register your product at  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com (US)  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada)  
• Protect your new investment  
The details of your purchase will be on file for reference in the event of an  
insurance claim such as loss or theft.  
• Receive free tips, updates and service bulletins on  
your new product  
• Improve product development  
Your input helps us continue to design products that meet your needs.  
• Receive a free Pioneer newsletter  
Registered customers can opt in to receive a monthly newsletter.  
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT  
CAUTION  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,  
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to  
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR  
CAUTION:  
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC  
The exclamation point within an equilateral  
triangle is intended to alert the user to the  
presence of important operating and  
"dangerous voltage" within the product's  
enclosure that may be of sufficient  
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric  
shock to persons.  
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS  
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED  
SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the  
literature accompanying the appliance.  
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A  
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by  
the manufacturer.  
1) Read these instructions.  
2) Keep these instructions.  
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or  
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with  
the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution  
when moving the cart/apparatus combination to  
avoid injury from tip-over.  
3) Heed all warnings.  
4) Follow all instructions.  
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.  
6) Clean only with dry cloth.  
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in  
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.  
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as  
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other  
apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce  
heat.  
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized  
or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two  
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms  
or when unused for long periods of time.  
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
Servicing is required when the apparatus has  
been damaged in any way, such as power-supply  
cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled  
or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the  
apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,  
does not operate normally, or has been dropped.  
P1-4-2-2_En  
blades with one wider than the other.  
A
grounding type plug has two blades and a third  
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third  
prong are provided for your safety. If the provided  
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an  
electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.  
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or  
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience  
receptacles, and the point where they exit from  
the apparatus.  
WARNING  
This product is for general household purposes. Any  
failure due to use for other than household purposes  
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a  
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires  
repair will be charged for even during the warranty  
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire  
or shock hazard, do not place any container filled  
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or  
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain  
period.  
K041_En  
or moisture.  
D3-4-2-1-3_B_En  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
To prevent fire hazard, the Class 2 Wiring Cable  
should be used for connection with speaker, and  
should be routed away from hazards to avoid  
damage to the insulation of the cable.  
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following  
section carefully.  
The voltage of the available power supply differs  
according to country or region. Be sure that the  
power supply voltage of the area where this unit  
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V  
or 120 V) written on the rear panel.  
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This product contains mercury. Disposal of this  
material may be regulated due to environmental  
considerations. For disposal or recycling  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or  
cords associated with accessories sold with the  
product will expose you to chemicals listed on  
proposition 65 known to the State of California and  
other governmental entities to cause cancer and  
birth defect or other reproductive harm.  
information, please contact your local authorities or  
the Electronics Industries Alliance : www.eiae.org.  
K057_En  
Wash hands after handling  
D36-P4_A_En  
For U.S. and Australia Model  
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC  
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed  
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and  
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of  
this unit should be performed only by qualified  
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the  
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make  
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.  
The equipment should be disconnected by removing  
the mains plug from the wall socket when left  
unused for a long period of time (for example, when  
on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate  
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.  
Contents  
01 Before you start  
05 Listening to your system  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Checking what’s in the box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Loading the batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Auto playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Listening in stereo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Using Stream Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Using surround back channel processing . . . . . . . . . 33  
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Using the genre synchronizing function. . . . . . . . . . . 35  
02 5 minute guide  
Introduction to home theater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Listening to Surround Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(Auto MCACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . 11  
Playing a source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Better sound using Phase Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
06 Using the tuner  
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Improving FM stereo sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Saving station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
03 Connecting your equipment  
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
When making cable connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
About the video converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
About HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Connecting your TV and DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Connecting your Blu-ray disc player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver  
07 The System Setup menu  
Making receiver settings from the System  
or other set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR  
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Surround back speaker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Fine Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Speaker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
and other video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Using the component video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Connecting digital audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
About the WMA9 Pro decoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Connecting analog audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Connecting a component to the front panel inputs. . . . 20  
Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Placing the speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Connecting antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Connecting external antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
04 Controls and displays  
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Operating range of remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
08 Other connections  
11 Using other functions  
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Connecting your iPod to the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
iPod playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Connecting your USB device to the receiver . . . . . . 53  
Basic playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Compressed audio compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Using XM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Connecting your XM Radio receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Listening to XM Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Using XM HD Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Saving channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Using the XM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Using SIRIUS Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Connecting your SiriusConnectTM Tuner. . . . . . . . . . 56  
Listening to SIRIUS Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Saving channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Using the SIRIUS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs. . . . . . . . 57  
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . . 58  
Speaker B setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Bi-amping your front speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Bi-wiring your speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Connecting additional amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
MULTI-ZONE listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Making MULTI-ZONE connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Connecting an IR receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat panel TV . . . . . 63  
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer  
Setting the Audio options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Setting the Video options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Making an audio or a video recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Dimming the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Switching the speaker impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Checking your system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
12 Controlling the rest of your system  
Setting the remote to control other components. . . . 76  
Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Controls for TVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Controls for other components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Operating other Pioneer components  
with this receiver’s sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
13 Additional information  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
No sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output . . . . . 84  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Important information regarding  
flat panel TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
09 HDMI Control  
the HDMI connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
XM radio messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
SIRIUS radio messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
DTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
About XM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
About SIRIUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
About Neural – THX Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Listening modes with different input  
Making the HDMI Control connections. . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Setting the HDMI options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Setting the HDMI Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Synchronized amp mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Synchronized amp mode operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
About HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
10 Other Settings  
signal formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Stream direct with different input signal formats . . . . 96  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Cleaning the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
The Input Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Input function default and possible settings . . . . . . 68  
The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
ZONE Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat panel TVs . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
OSD Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Chapter 1:  
Before you start  
•
Phase Control  
The Phase Control technology incorporated into this  
receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction  
through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound  
image at your listening position.  
Features  
•
Advanced Direct Energy design  
This receiver offers a new advancement in discrete  
design unique to Pioneer for high-power drivability, low  
distortion and stable imaging. Through a circuit design  
that minimizes the energy loss of the amplifier for each of  
the channels, this receiver generates equal amplifier  
power to all channels, eliminating the possibility of one  
channel dominating a particular sound field.  
•
Sound Retriever  
The Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology  
that helps bring CD quality sound back to WMA, MP3  
and MPEG-4 AAC audio files by restoring sound pressure  
and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after  
compression.  
•
Easy setup using Advanced MCACC  
•
Front Stage Surround Advance  
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate  
surround sound setup, which includes the advanced  
features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This  
innovative technology measures the reverb  
characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to  
customize your system calibration with the help of a  
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen. With  
the additional benefits of numerous MCACC preset  
memories, standing wave control and microphone  
measurements from a series of reference points, your  
home theater experience can be truly customized for  
optimal surround sound.  
With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature, you can  
enjoy seamless, natural surround sound effects using  
only the front speakers, without deteriorating the quality  
of the original sound.  
•
Auto Level Control  
When the source is played in Auto level control stereo  
mode (A.L.C.), this receiver automatically equalizes the  
playback sound level according to the variation in  
recording levels between music sources recorded in the  
portable audio player.  
•
HDMI and digital video conversion  
This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video  
format, providing you with high-definition digital video/  
audio via a single cable.  
•
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding, including Dolby  
Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, Dolby  
Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-EXPRESS and DTS-HD  
Master Audio  
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound  
right into your home with up to six channels of surround  
sound, including a special LFE (Low Frequency Effects)  
channel for deep, realistic sound effects.  
High-quality sound formats such as DTS-HD and Dolby  
TrueHD are supported while this receiver is also  
compatible with the DeepColor feature. You can operate  
this receiver in synchronization with your Pioneer  
component that supports the HDMI Control function by  
connecting your component to this receiver via HDMI.  
Also, the built-in digital video converter of this receiver  
makes both de-interlacing and up-scaling possible, and  
analog video signals being input are converted and  
output as digital video signals at the HDMI terminal.  
The built-in Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders  
not only provide full surround sound decoding for Dolby  
Surround sources, but will also generate convincing  
surround sound for any stereo source.  
Also, with the addition of a surround back speaker, you  
can take advantage of the built-in Dolby Digital EX and  
DTS-ES decoders for six-channel surround sound.  
•
iPod and USB Ready  
This receiver has the terminals for connecting an iPod  
unit and a USB mass storage device.  
Furthermore, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD,  
which are designed for the next-generation high-  
definition media such as Blu-ray Disc and HD DVD,  
support up to 7.1 channels and 8 channels respectively.  
The iPod terminal is ready for handling digital audio, and  
this receiver’s enhanced compatibility makes on-screen  
control of your iPod an added possibility.  
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology  
supporting up to 5.1 channels, with fixed data transfer  
rates ranging from 24 kbps to 256 kbps (this encoding is  
available only when signals are delivered to this receiver  
as primary audio).  
The USB terminal allows you to listen to two-channel  
audio from a USB mass storage device connected to this  
receiver.  
DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio signals to listeners  
without any loss of data with its high transfer rates.  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
•
XM and SIRIUS Ready  
With the new XM and SIRIUS Radio terminals, you’ll be  
up and running in no time. This receiver’s enhanced  
compatibility makes XM HD Surround playback as well  
as on-screen control of XM and SIRIUS Radio an added  
possibility.  
Loading the batteries  
Checking what’s in the box  
Please check that you’ve received the following supplied  
accessories:  
Caution  
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as  
leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:  
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.))  
• Remote control unit  
• Never use new and old batteries together.  
• AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries x2  
• AM loop antenna  
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries  
properly according to the marks in the battery case.  
• FM wire antenna  
• Batteries with the same shape may have different  
voltages. Do not use different batteries together.  
• Warranty card  
• These operating instructions  
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply  
with governmental regulations or environmental  
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or  
area.  
Installing the receiver  
• WARNING  
• When installing this receiver, make sure to put it on a  
level and stable surface.  
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or  
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or  
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,  
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the  
life or performance of batteries.  
Don’t install it on the following places:  
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)  
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off  
a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.  
– in direct sunlight  
– in damp or wet areas  
– in extremely hot or cold areas  
– in places where there is vibration or other movement  
– in places that are very dusty  
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 minute guide  
02  
C5hampteri2n: ute guide  
Where you place the speakers will have a big effect on the  
sound. Place your speakers as shown below for the best  
surround sound effect. Also see Placing the speakers on  
page 22 for more on this.  
Introduction to home theater  
Home theater refers to the use of multiple audio tracks to  
create a surround sound effect, making you feel like  
you’re in the middle of the action or concert. The  
surround sound you get from a home theater system  
depends not only on your speaker setup, but also on the  
source and the sound settings of the receiver.  
Center (C)  
Front  
Right (R)  
Front  
Left (L)  
Surround  
Right (SR)  
Subwoofer (SW)  
This receiver will automatically decode multichannel  
Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround sources according  
to your speaker setup. In most cases, you won’t have to  
make changes for realistic surround sound, but other  
possibilities (like listening to a CD with multichannel  
surround sound) are explained in Listening to your  
system on page 30.  
Surround  
Back Right (SBR)  
Listening  
position  
Surround  
Left (SL)  
Surround Back Left (SBL)  
3
Plug in the receiver and switch it on, followed by  
Listening to Surround Sound  
your DVD player, your subwoofer and the TV.  
Plug the power cable into the AC outlet and switch on the  
receiver. Make sure you’ve set the video input on your TV  
to this receiver. Check the manual that came with the TV  
if you don’t know how to do this.  
This receiver was designed with the easiest possible  
setup in mind, so with the following quick setup guide,  
you should have your system hooked up for surround  
sound in no time at all. In most cases, you can simply  
leave the receiver in the default settings.  
1
• Set the subwoofer volume to a comfortable level.  
• Be sure to complete all connections before  
connecting this receiver to an AC power source.  
4
Use the on-screen automatic MCACC setup to set up  
your system.  
1
Connect your TV and DVD player.  
See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto  
MCACC) on page 10 for more on this.  
See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 17 to do  
this. For surround sound, you’ll want to hook up using a  
digital connection from the DVD player to the receiver.  
5
Play a DVD, and adjust the volume to your liking.  
Make sure that DVD is showing in the receiver’s display,  
indicating that the DVD input is selected. If it isn’t, press  
DVD on the remote control to set the receiver to the DVD  
input.  
2
Connect your speakers and place them for optimal  
surround sound.  
Connect your speakers as shown in Installing your  
speaker system on page 21.  
In addition to the basic playback explained in Playing a  
source on page 11, there are several other sound options  
you can select. See Listening to your system on page 30  
for more on this.  
See also Making receiver settings from the System Setup  
menu on page 38 for more setup options.  
Note  
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 15-second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during this process.  
The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the  
HDMI Control mode to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the HDMI Control feature, see HDMI Control on page 65.  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 minute guide  
02  
1
2
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Automatically setting up for surround  
sound (Auto MCACC)  
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC  
jack on the front panel.  
Place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your  
normal listening position (use a tripod if possible). Make  
sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and  
the microphone.  
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic  
characteristics of your listening area, taking into account  
ambient noise, speaker size and distance, and tests for  
both channel delay and channel level. After you have set  
up the microphone provided with your system, the  
receiver uses the information from a series of test tones  
to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your  
particular room.  
AUTO SURR/  
SOUND  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
STEREO/  
A.L.C.  
STREAM DIRECT RETRIEVER  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
iPod DIRECT  
USB  
MCACC  
SSEETUP MIC  
VIDEO  
L
R
DIGITAL IN  
PHONES  
MULTI-ZONE  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
SPEAKERS  
ST  
–
ST  
+
The Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone  
Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a  
source on page 11.  
1
is connected.  
1.Auto MCACC  
Important  
Surround Back System  
[
Normal  
]
Save SYMMETRY to  
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not  
moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.  
[
M1.MEMORY  
START  
1
]
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any  
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.  
ENTER:Start  
:Cancel  
3
Make sure ‘Normal’ is selected,2 select an MCACC  
preset3, press RECEIVER and then select START4  
Follow the instructions on-screen.  
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re  
using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to  
a comfortable volume level.  
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the  
headphones should be disconnected and the iPod  
USB, XM or SIRIUS Radio function should not be  
selected as an input source.  
.
4
Caution  
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are  
output at high volume.  
5
Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the  
speaker configuration in the OSD.  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers  
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while  
EXIT  
TUNE TOOLS  
MEM  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
TOP MENU  
ST  
MENU  
T.EDIT  
RECEIVER  
DVD  
DVR 1  
FM/AM  
BD  
TV  
CD  
HDMI  
CD-R  
ENTER  
ST  
5
it’s doing this.  
DVR 2  
CATEGORY  
RETURN  
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the  
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,  
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this  
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in  
step 6.  
MAIN  
ZONE  
2
XM  
SIRIUS iPod USB  
SETUP TUNE  
iPod CTRL  
INPUT  
Note  
1 • You can’t use the System Setup menu in either the main or sub zone when the iPod USB, XM or SIRIUS Radio input source is selected. When you set  
ZONE 2 to ON (page 61), you can’t use the System Setup menu.  
• If you cancel the Auto MCACC Setup, or leave an error message for over three minutes, the screen saver will appear.  
2 If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker setting  
on page 41 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.  
3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can  
rename it later in Data Management on page 46).  
4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJUST and  
FRONT ALIGN). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38 for more on this.  
5 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 minute guide  
02  
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient  
noise! or Check Microphone.) select RETRY after  
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when  
using the Auto MCACC Setup below) and verifying the  
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a  
problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and  
continue.  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup  
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto  
MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the  
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the  
microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check  
for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan,  
etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch  
them off if necessary. If there are any instructions  
showing in the front panel display, please follow them.  
1.Auto MCACC  
Now Analyzing  
1.Auto MCACC  
CHECK!  
…
(2/9)  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
SB  
[
[
[
YES  
YES  
YES  
]
]
]
]
]
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of  
the microphone. If this seems to be happening,  
switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.  
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
[
[
[
OK  
]
]
]
[
[
YES  
YES  
x
2
SW  
Speaker YES/NO  
OK  
:Cancel  
10  
:Cancel  
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the  
1
Playing a source  
actual speakers you have.  
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such  
as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.  
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side  
column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t  
correct), there may be a problem with the speaker  
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the  
power and check the speaker connections. If there  
doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use /  
to select the speaker and / to change the setting  
(and number for surround back) and continue.  
4
SR+  
7
5
SBch  
8
6
A.ATT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
CATEGORY  
RETURN  
9
CLASS  
SETUP TUNE  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
iPod CTRL  
ENTER  
0
DVD  
DVR 1  
FM/AM  
BD  
DVR 2  
XM  
TV  
CD  
HDMI  
CD-R  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
INPUT  
AUTO/  
STEREO/  
A.L.C.  
BD MENU  
STANDARD  
ADV SURR  
DIRECT  
HDD  
DVD  
TV CONTROL  
SIRIUS iPod USB  
THX  
STATUS  
PHASE  
CH  
VOL  
MUTE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
DIMMER  
6
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
1
2
3
PARAMETER  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
CH  
GENRE  
MCACC  
SLEEP  
EXIT  
TUNE TOOLS  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the  
optimum receiver settings for Channel Level, Speaker  
Distance, Standing Wave and Acoustic Cal EQ.  
4
5
6
1
Switch on your system components and receiver.  
Start by switching on the playback component (for  
example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you  
have one), then the receiver (press RECEIVER).  
4
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is  
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.  
• Make sure the setup mic is disconnected.  
7
The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press RETURN  
2
Select the input source you want to play.  
to go back to the System Setup menu.2  
You can use the input source buttons on the remote  
control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel controls.  
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver  
upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.  
5
3
Press AUTO/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/STREAM  
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give  
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is  
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the  
DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and start  
playback of the source.6  
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound  
DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are  
playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the  
front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.  
3
System Setup menu (starting on page 38).  
• See also Listening to your system on page 30 for  
information on different ways of listening to sources.  
Note  
1 If you’re using the front panel display, the diagram in Listening to Surround Sound on page 9 indicates (in bold) how each speaker is displayed.  
2 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38 for more on this.  
3 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with different size  
settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 48.  
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and  
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.  
4 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO 1 jacks on your TV, make sure that the  
VIDEO 1 input is now selected).  
5 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 33).  
6 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and  
88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.  
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must be set to a  
multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 30 if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround sound.  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 minute guide  
02  
It is possible to check on the display whether or not multi-  
channel playback is being performed properly.  
Phase Control ON  
Front speaker  
Listening  
position  
When using a surround back speaker, 2D+PL IIx  
MOVIE is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals,  
and DTS+Neo:6 is displayed when playing DTS 5.1-  
channel signals.  
Sound  
source  
Original sound  
preserved with no  
loss of clarity  
When not using a surround back speaker, DOLBY  
DIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals.  
Subwoofer  
4
Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.  
• Rhythms with crystal-like clarity  
• Bass sound with no loss of depth  
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is  
coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.  
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality  
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound  
1
Better sound using Phase Control  
reproduction through the use of phase matching for an  
optimal sound image at your listening position. The  
default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase  
Control switched on for all sound sources.  
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase  
correction measures to make sure your sound source  
arrives at the listening position in phase, preventing  
unwanted distortion and/or coloring of the sound (see  
illustration below).  
THX  
STATUS  
PHASE  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
During multichannel playback, LFE (Low-Frequency  
Effects) signals as well as low-frequency signals in each  
channel are assigned to the subwoofer or other the  
subwoofer and the most appropriate speaker. At least in  
theory, however, this type of processing involves a group  
delay that varies with frequency, resulting in phase  
distortion where the low-frequency sound is delayed or  
muffled by the conflict with other channels. With the  
Phase Control mode switched on, this receiver can  
reproduce powerful bass sound without deteriorating the  
quality of the original sound (see illustration below).  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
RECEIVER  
•
Press RECEIVER, then press PHASE (PHASE  
CONTROL) to switch on phase correction.  
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.  
Phase Control OFF  
Front speaker  
Listening  
position  
Sound  
source  
Sound muffled due  
to a delay in time  
Subwoofer  
• Rhythms blurred and difficult to hear  
• Bass sound with loss of depth  
• Sound of musical instruments with no reality  
Note  
1 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough together,  
resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough (as shown in the upper section of the diagram  
above), then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.  
• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.  
• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set  
to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the  
orientation or the place of your subwoofer.  
• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to OFF. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher value.  
• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.  
• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:  
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.  
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 71.  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Chapter 3:  
Connecting your equipment  
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the  
kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.  
Rear panel  
NENT VIDEO  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
HDMI  
OUT  
ANTENNA  
1
2
7
10 12 1  
3
2
IN  
3
16  
XIAL  
1
-
2
ASSIGNABLE  
Y
VIDEO  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
PB  
FM UNBAL 75  
AM LOOP  
IN  
2
(CD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
PR  
DVD  
AUDIO  
TV SAT  
IN  
DVR1  
OUT  
DVR2  
OUT  
S ZONE 2  
1
-
3
BD IN  
11  
PRE OUT  
(Single)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
CENTER  
3
IN  
14  
15  
5
L
OAL  
1
(T)  
OUT  
4
IN  
IN  
1
R
IN  
2
SUBWOOFER  
SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
(DVR1)  
CD  
CD-R  
6
2  
ERS  
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK /  
B
IN  
9
L
R
L
R
L
ASSIGNABLE  
1
8
2
-
2
MULTI CH IN  
(Single)  
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
OUT  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
1
-
2
OUT  
L
DIGITAL  
R
SUBWOOFER  
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL  
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI  
5
Control input/output  
Caution  
Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you  
can control all your equipment from a single IR remote  
sensor.  
• Before making or changing the connections, switch  
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.  
See Operating other Pioneer components with this  
receiver’s sensor on page 79.  
1
HDMI connectors (x4)  
Three inputs and one output for high-quality audio/video  
connection to compatible HDMI devices.  
6
Remote input/output (MULTI-ZONE)  
Use for connection to an external remote control sensor  
for use in a MULTI-ZONE setup, for example.  
See Connecting an IR receiver on page 62.  
See Connecting using HDMI on page 16.  
2
Coaxial digital audio inputs (x2)  
Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/  
recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.  
7
Audio/video source inputs/(outputs) (x6)  
Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD  
players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks  
for composite video and stereo analog audio.  
See Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other  
video sources on page 18.  
See also The Input Setup menu on page 67 to assign  
the inputs.  
3
XM Radio input  
See Using XM Radio on page 54.  
8
Multichannel analog audio inputs  
4
Optical digital audio output/input(s) (x3)  
Use the OUT jack for recording to a CD or MiniDisc  
recorder.  
See Connecting digital audio sources on page 19.  
Use the IN jacks for digital audio sources, including DVD  
7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with  
multichannel analog outputs.  
See Using XM Radio on page 54.  
9
Speaker terminals  
Use for connection to the main front, center, surround  
and surround back speakers.  
See Installing your speaker system on page 21.  
players/recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players,  
etc.  
See also The Input Setup menu on page 67 to assign  
the inputs.  
10 Composite monitor outputs  
Use to connect monitors and TVs.  
See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 17.  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
11 SIRIUS Radio input  
See Using SIRIUS Radio on page 56.  
12 ZONE 2 audio/video outputs  
Use to connect a second receiver in a separate room.  
See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 60.  
13 Component video connections (x4)  
Use the inputs to connect any video source that has  
component video output, such as a DVD recorder. Use  
the output for connection to a monitor or TV.  
See Using the component video jacks on page 19.  
14 Stereo analog audio source inputs/(outputs) (x3)  
Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players,  
tape decks, turntables, etc.  
See Connecting analog audio sources on page 20.  
15 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs  
Use to connect separate amplifiers for front, center,  
surround, surround back and subwoofer channels.  
See Connecting additional amplifiers on page 60 (see  
also Installing your speaker system on page 21 for  
powered subwoofer connection).  
16 AM and FM antenna terminals  
Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio  
broadcasts.  
See Connecting antennas on page 23.  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
When making cable connections  
03  
About the video converter  
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the  
top of the receiver.  
The video converter ensures that all video sources are  
output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks.  
The only exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot  
be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to  
the receiver’s HDMI video outputs when connecting this  
1
video source.  
If several video components are assigned to the same  
input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 67),  
the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, then  
composite (in that order).  
• When connecting optical cables, be careful when  
inserting the plug not to damage the shutter  
protecting the optical socket.  
Terminal for connection  
with source device  
Terminal for connection  
with TV monitor  
HDMI IN  
HDMI OUT  
Y
Y
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable  
may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.  
PB  
PB  
PR  
PR  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
VIDEO IN  
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
Video signals can be output  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is  
protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other  
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and  
other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology  
must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended  
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise  
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or  
disassembly is prohibited.  
Note  
1 • If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat panel TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some  
components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video  
options on page 72) OFF.  
• The ZONE 2 video input can also be converted. For details, see Setting the Video options on page 72.  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting using HDMI  
03  
2
Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT  
interconnect on this receiver to an HDMI interconnect  
on an HDMI-compatible monitor.  
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped  
component, you can connect it to this receiver using a  
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be  
facing left for correct alignment with the connector  
on the player.  
1
commercially available HDMI cable.  
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital  
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the  
connected component is compatible with, including  
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby  
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for  
limitations), Video CD/Super VCD, CD and MP3. See  
About the video converter on page 15 for more on HDMI  
compatibility.  
3
Use the INPUT SELECT button to select the HDMI  
input you’ve connected to (for example, HDMI 2).  
You can also perform the same operation by using the  
INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing  
HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.  
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor or  
flat panel TV  
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options  
on page 71 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI  
audio output from your TV or flat panel TV (no sound  
will be heard from this receiver).  
HDMI IN  
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat  
panel TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your  
component or display. Note that some components  
(such as video game units) have resolutions that may  
not be converted. In this case, use an analog video  
connection.  
HDMI  
COAXIAL  
1
-
2
ASSIGNABLE  
VIDEO  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
IN  
2
(CD)  
DVD  
AUDIO  
TV SAT  
IN  
DVR1  
OUT  
DVR  
OUT  
• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s  
digital out jacks.  
BD IN  
IN  
IN  
XM IN  
CON- IN  
TROL  
L
OPTICAL  
IN  
1
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
(TV SAT)  
R
IN  
2
IR  
ZONE2  
(DVR1)  
About HDMI  
SPEA  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
2
A
-
2
MULTI CH IN  
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports  
both video and audio on a single digital connection for  
use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV  
devices. HDMI was developed to provide the  
technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content  
Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface  
(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital  
content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant  
displays.  
OUT  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
1
-
2
OUT  
L
DIGITAL  
R
SUBWOOFER  
VSX-1018AH  
HDMI/DVI-equipped component  
HDMI OUT  
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,  
or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel  
surround-sound audio. HDMI features include  
uncompressed digital video, one connector (instead of  
several cables and connectors), and communication  
between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.  
1
Use an HDMI cable to connect one of the HDMI IN  
interconnects on this receiver to an HDMI output on  
your HDMI component.  
The HDMI indicator lights on the front panel when an  
HDMI-equipped component is connected.  
HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI  
Licensing LLC.  
Note  
1 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection  
(HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support  
audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.  
• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some components  
that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.  
• Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.  
• This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure  
that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
3
Connect a coaxial-type1 digital audio output on  
your DVD player to the COAXIAL IN 1 DVD) input.  
Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio.  
(
Connecting your TV and DVD player  
4
Connect the stereo audio outputs on your DVD  
player to the DVD AUDIO inputs.  
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.  
VIDEO  
IN  
• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs,  
you can connect these instead. See also Using XM  
Radio on page 54.  
TV  
1
VSX-1018AH  
HDMI  
OU  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
2
VIDEO  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
Connecting your Blu-ray disc player  
DVD  
AUDIO  
TV SAT  
IN  
DVR1  
OUT  
DVR2  
OUT  
SIRIUS ZON  
BD IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OU  
XM IN  
CON- IN  
VSX-1018AH  
TROL  
L
OPTICAL  
1
(TV SAT)  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
HDMI  
OU  
R
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
2
1
-
2
IR  
(DVR1)  
VIDEO  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
ZONE2  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
BLE  
R
OUT  
IN  
1
2
A
2
MULTI CH IN  
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
(DVD)  
ASSI
AB
OUT  
FRONT  
OUT  
2
IN  
(CD)  
DVD  
AUDIO  
TV SAT  
IN  
DVR1  
OUT  
DVR2  
OUT  
SIRIUS ZON  
L
BD IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OU  
XM IN  
CON- IN  
TROL  
DIGITAL  
L
OPTICAL  
R
IN  
1
OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
IN  
IN  
1
(TV SAT)  
R
IN  
2
IR  
(DVR1)  
ZONE2  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
R
2
A
-
2
MULTI CH IN  
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
OUT  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
1
-
2
OUT  
L
DIGITAL  
R
SUBWOOFER  
COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
R
AUDIO  
L
DIGITAL OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
ANALOG OUT  
3
2
4
HDMI OUT  
Blu-ray disc player  
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together  
with a Blu-ray disc player, with HDMI connections. If your  
Blu-ray disc player offers multi-channel analog audio  
outputs, see Using XM Radio on page 54.  
DVD player  
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together  
with a TV and DVD player, with composite video  
connections. Different TVs and DVD players may offer  
alternative connections. See also Using the component  
video jacks on page 19 if your TV and/or DVD player has  
component video inputs/outputs. If your DVD player  
offers multichannel analog audio outputs, see Using XM  
Radio on page 54.  
•
Connect an HDMI output on your Blu-ray disc  
player to the BD HDMI input.  
Connect using an HDMI cable.  
1
Connect the MONITOR OUT video jack to a video  
input on your TV.  
Use a standard RCA/phono jack video cable to connect to  
the composite video jack.  
2
Connect a composite output on your DVD player to  
the DVD VIDEO input.  
Connect using a standard video cable.  
Note  
1 If your DVD player only has an optical digital output, you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver using an optical cable. When you set  
up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 67).  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or  
other set-top box  
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR  
and other video sources  
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV  
tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.  
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and  
outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video  
devices, including DVD/HDD recorders and VCRs.  
VSX-1018AH  
VSX-1018AH  
HDMI  
OU  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
2
C
HDMI  
VIDEO  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
IN  
1
1
-
2
(DVD)  
VIDEO  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
1
IN  
2
(DVD)  
(CD)  
DVD  
AUDIO  
TV SAT  
IN  
DVR1  
OUT  
DVR2  
OUT  
SIRIUS ZON  
BD IN  
IN  
2
(CD)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OU  
XM IN  
N- IN  
OL  
DVD  
AUDIO  
TV SAT  
IN  
DVR1  
OUT  
D
OUT  
SIRIUS ZONE 2  
BD IN  
L
OPTICAL  
IN  
1
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
X
CON- IN  
TROL  
IN  
IN  
1
(TV SAT)  
L
L  
R
N  
1
OUT  
IR  
ZONE2  
IN  
IN  
1
(TV SAT)  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
R
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
R
IN  
2
2
A
-
2
MULTI CH IN  
IR  
(DVR1)  
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
ZONE2  
OUT  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
IN  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
AE  
R
L
2
1
-
2
A
OUT  
MULTI CH IN  
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
OUT  
L
FRONT  
1
-
2
T  
L
DIGITAL  
R
SUBWOOFER  
DIGITAL  
R
SUBWOOFER  
DIGITAL OUT  
R
AUDIO  
L
VIDEO  
AV OUT  
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
R
AUDIO  
L
VIDEO  
R
AUDIO  
L
VIDEO  
AV IN  
AV OUT  
3
1
2
STB  
1
Connect the audio/video outputs on the set-top  
box to the TV SAT AUDIO and VIDEO inputs.  
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable and a  
video cable.  
DVR, VCR, etc.  
1
Connect the audio/video outputs of the video  
player/recorder to the DVR1 AUDIO and VIDEO inputs.  
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio  
connection and a video cable for the video connection.  
2
Connect an optical-type1 digital audio output from  
your set-top box to the OPTICAL IN 1  
TV SAT) input.2  
(
Use an optical cable for the connection.  
• For a second recorder, use the DVR2 IN inputs.  
2
If the device can record, connect the DVR1 AUDIO  
and VIDEO outputs to the recorder’s audio/video  
inputs.  
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio  
connection and a video cable for the video connection.  
• For a second recorder, use the DVR2 OUT outputs.  
Note  
1 If your set-top box only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable.  
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 67).  
2 If your satellite/cable receiver doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
3
If the device can output digital audio, connect an  
1
Connect the component video outputs of your  
optical-type1 digital audio output from the recorder to  
source to a set of ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO  
inputs.  
Connect using a three-way component video cable.  
the OPTICAL IN 2  
(DVR1) input.  
2
Use an optical cable for the connection.  
• Since they are assignable, it doesn’t matter which  
component video inputs you use for which source.  
After connecting everything, you’ll need to assign the  
component video inputs—see The Input Setup menu  
on page 67.  
Using the component video jacks  
Component video should give superior picture quality  
when compared to composite. You can also take  
advantage of progressive scan video (if your source and  
TV are both compatible), which delivers a very stable,  
flicker-free picture. See the manuals that came with your  
TV and source component to check whether they are  
compatible with progressive-scan video.  
2
Connect the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT  
jacks to the component video inputs on your TV or  
monitor.  
Use a three-way component video cable.  
Connecting digital audio sources  
Y
This receiver has both digital inputs and outputs,  
allowing you to connect digital audio components for  
playback and for making digital recordings.  
P
B
R
P
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
Most digital components also have analog connections.  
See Connecting analog audio sources on page 20 if you  
want to connect these too.  
2
TV  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
1
2
IN  
3
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
VSX-1018AH  
PBB  
AM LOOP  
HDMI  
E  
PRR  
DVR1  
OUT  
DVR2  
OUT  
SIRI2  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
2
PRE OUT  
(Single)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
FRONT  
VIDEO  
IN  
MO  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
IN  
2
(CD)  
DVD  
AUDIO  
TV SAT  
IN  
DVR1  
OUT  
DVR2  
OUT IN  
S
SUBWOOFER  
CD  
CD-R  
SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
BD IN  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK /  
B
IN  
IN  
R
L
R
L
R
L
XM IN  
A
CON- IN  
TROL  
(Single)  
TI CH IN  
SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
L
OPTICAL  
IN  
1
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
(TV SAT)  
R
IN  
2
IR  
(DVR1)  
E2  
SPEAKERS  
F
R
ASSIGNABLE  
1
2
A
MULTI CH IN  
-
2
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL  
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
1
-
2
OUT  
L
VSX-1018AH  
DIGITAL  
R
SUBWOOFER  
Y
PB  
PR  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
1
OPTICAL  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
DVD player  
DIGITAL IN  
2
1
CD-R, MD,  
DAT, etc.  
Note  
1 • In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback only).  
• If your video component doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.  
2 If your recorder only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable. When  
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 67).  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connect a coaxial-type1 digital audio output on  
•
Connect the analog audio outputs of the source  
1
component to one of the AUDIO inputs.  
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable.  
your digital component to the COAXIAL IN 2 (CD)  
input.  
Use a coaxial cable for the connection.  
• If you’re connecting a tape deck, MD recorder, etc.,  
connect the analog audio outputs (OUT) to the  
analog audio inputs on the recorder.  
2
For recording equipment, connect the optical-type  
DIGITAL output to a digital input on the recorder.  
2
Use an optical cable to connect to the OPTICAL OUT.  
Connecting a component to the front  
panel inputs  
About the WMA9 Pro decoder  
This receiver has an on-board Windows Media™ Audio 9  
3
The front panel inputs comprise a composite video jack  
(VIDEO), stereo analog audio inputs (AUDIO L/R) and an  
optical digital audio input (DIGITAL IN). You can use  
these connections for any kind of audio/video  
Professional (WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to  
playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using a coaxial or  
optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9  
Pro-compatible player. However, the connected PC, DVD  
player, set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro  
format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital  
output.  
component, but they are especially convenient for  
portable equipment such as camcorders, video games  
and portable audio/video equipment.  
AUTO SURR/  
STREAM DIRECT RETRIEVER  
SOUND  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
STEREO/  
A.L.C.  
V
V
I
I
D
D
E
E
O
O
INPUT  
INPUT  
i
i
P
P
o
o
d
d
D
D
I
I
R
R
E
E
C
C
T
T
MCACC  
V
V
I
I
D
D
E
E
O
O
L
L
A
A
U
U
D
D
I
I
O
O
R
R
D
D
I
I
G
G
I
I
T
T
A
A
L
L
I
I
N
N
U
U
S
S
B
B
SETUP MIC  
PHONES  
MULTI-ZONE  
–
+
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
SPEAKERS  
ST  
ST  
Connecting analog audio sources  
This receiver features two stereo audio-only inputs. One  
of these inputs (CD-R) has corresponding outputs for use  
with audio recorders.  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
1
2
IN  
3
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
PB  
FM UNBAL 75  
AM LOOP  
ASSIGNABLE  
PR  
VIDEO OUTPUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
DVR1  
DVR2  
OUT  
SIRIUS ZONE 2  
1
-
3
(Single) PRE OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
FRONT  
CENTER  
TV game, video camera, etc.  
• Select these inputs by pressing VIDEO or using  
INPUT SELECT (remote) to select VIDEO.  
SUBWOOFER  
CD  
CD-R  
SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK /  
B
R
L
R
L
R
L
A
I CH IN  
(Single)  
SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL  
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI  
VSX-1018AH  
OUT  
PLAY  
IN  
REC  
R
L
AUDIO IN/OUT  
Tape deck, etc.  
Note  
1 • If your digital component only has an optical digital output, you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver using an optical cable. When  
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 67).  
• The digital outputs from other components can be connected to any spare digital audio inputs on this receiver. You can assign them when setting up  
the receiver (see also The Input Setup menu on page 67).  
2 In order to record some digital sources, you must make analog connections as explained in Connecting analog audio sources below.  
3 • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Installing your speaker system  
To take full advantage of the receiver’s surround sound capabilities connect front, center, surround and surround back  
1
speakers, as well as a subwoofer. Although this is ideal, other configurations with fewer speakers—no subwoofer or  
no center speaker, or even no surround speakers—will work. At the very least, front left and right speakers only are  
necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just  
one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal). You can use speakers  
with a nominal impedance between 6 Ω and 16 Ω (please see Switching the speaker impedance on page 74 if you plan  
to use speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).  
Front  
left  
Front  
right  
Subwoofer  
Center  
LINE LEVEL  
INPUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
HDMI  
OUT  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
1
2
IN  
3
COAXIAL  
1
-
2
ASSIGNABLE  
Y
VIDEO  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
P
B
FM UNBAL 75  
ASSIGNABLE  
AM LOOP  
IN  
2
PR  
(CD)  
DVD  
TV SAT  
IN  
DVR1  
OUT  
DVR2  
OUT  
SIRIUS ZONE 2  
IN  
1
-
3
BD IN  
AUDIO  
IN  
PRE OUT  
(Single)  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
FRONT  
CENTER  
XM IN  
CON- IN  
TROL  
L
OPTICAL  
IN  
1
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
(TV SAT)  
R
IN  
2
IR  
(DVR1)  
CD  
CD-R  
SUBWOOFER  
SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
ZONE2  
SPEAKERS  
F
R
O
N
T
C
E
N
T
E
R
S
S
U
U
R
R
R
R
O
O
U
U
N
N
D
D
S
S
U
U
R
R
R
R
O
O
U
U
N
N
D
D
B
B
A
A
C
C
K
K
//  
B
IN  
R
L
R
LL  
RR  
L
ASSIGNABLE  
2
MULTI CH IN  
(Single)  
1
-
2
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
OUT  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
1
-
2
OUT  
L
DIGITAL  
R
SUBWOOFER  
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL  
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI  
VSX-1018AH  
Surround  
left  
Surround  
right  
Surround  
back left  
Surround  
back right  
Connecting the speakers  
Caution  
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a  
positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to  
match these up with the terminals on the speakers  
themselves.  
• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE  
voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when  
connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,  
disconnect the power cord before touching any  
uninsulated parts.  
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted  
together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.  
If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel  
it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.  
Note  
1 • When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single) terminals.  
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the surround back channel.  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
• When placing speakers near the TV, we recommend  
using magnetically shielded speakers to prevent  
possible interference, such as discoloration of the  
picture when the TV is switched on. If you do not have  
magnetically shielded speakers and notice  
discoloration of the TV picture, move the speakers  
farther away from the TV.  
Bare wire connections  
Make sure that the speaker cable you’re going to use is  
properly prepared with about 10 mm ( /8 in.) of insulator  
stripped from each wire, and the exposed wire strands  
3
twisted together (fig. A).  
To connect a terminal, unscrew the terminal a few turns  
until there is enough space to insert the exposed wire  
(fig. B). Once the wire is in position, tighten the terminal  
until the wire is firmly clamped (fig. C).  
• If you’re using a center speaker, place the front  
speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a  
narrower angle.  
fig. A  
fig. B  
fig. C  
• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so  
that the sound of the center channel is localized at  
the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker  
does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of  
the front left and right speakers.  
3
10 mm ( /8 in.)  
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening  
position. The angle depends on the size of the room.  
Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.  
Banana plug connections  
If you want to use speaker cables terminated with banana  
plugs, screw the speaker terminal fully shut, then plug  
the banana plug into the end of the speaker terminal.  
• Surround and surround back speakers should be  
positioned 60 cm to 90 cm (2 ft. to 3 ft.) higher than  
your ears and titled slight downward. Make sure the  
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the  
speakers should be more directly behind the listener  
than for home theater playback.  
• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away  
from the listening position than the front and center  
speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound  
effect.  
Important  
• To achieve the best possible surround sound, install  
your speakers as shown below. Be sure all speakers  
are installed securely to prevent accidents and  
improve sound quality.  
• Please refer to the manual that came with your  
speakers for details on how to connect the other end  
of the speaker cables to your speakers.  
• Other connections on page 51 provides greater detail  
on alternate speaker setups, such as using speaker  
system B (page 58), bi-amping and bi-wiring  
(page 59).  
Front  
right  
Front  
left  
Center  
Subwoofer  
Placing the speakers  
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect  
on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines  
should help you to get the best sound from your system.  
Surround  
right  
Surround  
left  
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the  
other speakers should be at about ear-level when  
you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the  
floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very  
high on a wall is not recommended.  
Listening position  
Surround back left  
Surround back right  
Single surround back speaker  
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers  
2 m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) apart, at equal distance from  
the TV.  
Caution  
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.  
This not only improves sound quality, but also  
reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from  
speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of  
external shocks such as earthquakes.  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
The diagrams below show suggested surround and  
surround back speaker orientation. The first diagram (fig.  
A) shows orientation with one surround back speaker (or  
none) connected. The second (fig. B) shows orientation  
with two surround back speakers connected.  
4
Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a  
direction giving the best reception.  
5
Connect the FM wire antenna in the same way as  
the AM loop antenna.  
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a  
wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.  
90° to 120°  
Connecting external antennas  
To improve FM reception connect an external FM  
antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 Ω terminal.  
RS  
LS  
RS  
RS  
LS  
0° to 60°  
LS  
SBL  
SBR  
SBL SBR  
SB  
fig. A  
fig. B  
75 Ω coaxial cable  
Connecting antennas  
ANTENNA  
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna  
as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality,  
connect external antennas (see Connecting external  
antennas on page 23).  
FM UNBAL 75  
AM LOOP  
fig. a  
fig. b  
fig. c  
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m (16 ft. to  
20 ft.) length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP  
terminals without disconnecting the supplied AM loop  
antenna.  
3
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally  
outdoors.  
ANTENNA  
5
Outdoor antenna  
FM UNBAL 75  
AM LOOP  
4
Indoor antenna  
(vinyl-coated wire)  
1
2
ANTENNA  
5 m to 6 m  
(16 ft. to 20 ft.)  
1
Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna  
FM UNBAL 75  
AM LOOP  
wires.  
2
Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into  
each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM  
antenna wires.  
3
Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.  
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction  
indicated by the arrow (fig. a), then clip the loop onto the  
stand (fig. b).  
• If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other  
surface, secure the stand with screws (fig. c) before  
clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the  
reception is clear.  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Plugging in the receiver  
03  
Only plug in after you have connected all your  
components to this receiver, including the speakers.  
Caution  
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull  
out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the  
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could  
cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place  
the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the  
power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never  
make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The  
power cords should be routed so that they are not  
likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can  
cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the  
power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged,  
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent  
service company for a replacement.  
• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the  
mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular  
use, e.g., when on vacation.  
• Make sure the blue STANDBY/ON light has gone  
out before unplugging.  
•
Plug the power cord into a power outlet.  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
04  
Chapter 4:  
Controls and displays  
Front panel  
1 2  
3
4
5
6
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER VSX-1018AH  
STANDBY/ON  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
ADVANCED  
MCACC  
DIGITAL PRECISION  
PROCESSING  
DIGITAL VIDEO  
SCALER  
HDMI  
DVD  
BD  
TV SAT  
DVR 1/DVR  
2
VIDEO  
HDMI 1/HDMI  
2
CD/CD-R  
FM/AM  
XM/SIRIUS  
iPod USB  
MULTI CH IN  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
AUTO SURR/  
STREAM DIRECT RETRIEVER  
SOUND  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
STEREO/  
A.L.C.  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
iPod DIRECT  
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
VIDEO  
L
R
DIGITAL IN  
PHONES  
MULTI-ZONE  
–
+
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
SPEAKERS  
ST  
ST  
11  
12  
7
8
9
10  
AUTO SURR/  
STREAM DIRECT RETRIEVER  
SOUND  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
STEREO/  
A.L.C.  
PHONES  
MULTI-ZONE  
–
+
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
SPEAKERS  
ST  
ST  
13  
INPUT SELECTOR dial  
Use to select an input source.  
14  
15  
1
DIGITAL VIDEO SCALER indicator – Lights when  
Resolution is set to a setting other than PURE (for  
example, when the video input signal is upscaled)  
(page 71).  
2
STANDBY/ON  
Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power  
indicator lights when the receiver is on.  
HDMI indicator – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-  
equipped component; lights when the component is  
connected (page 65).  
3
Remote sensor  
Receives the signals from the remote control (see  
Operating range of remote control unit on page 26).  
5
MULTI CH IN  
Press to select the multichannel analog inputs (page 57).  
4
PHASE CONTROL indicator – Lights when the Phase  
Control is switched on (page 12).  
6
MASTER VOLUME dial  
ADVANCED MCACC indicator – Lights when one of  
the MCACC presets (page 32) is selected.  
7
Input source buttons  
1
Press to select an input source.  
VIDEO INPUT  
DIGITAL PRECISION PROCESSING indicator –  
Lights to indicate digital processing (for example, it  
disappears when Pure Direct (page 32) is on, or when  
listening through the multichannel analog inputs).  
8
See Connecting a component to the front panel inputs on  
page 20.  
9
iPod DIRECT USB terminal  
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio source  
(page 51), or connect a USB audio device for playback  
(page 53).  
Note  
1 The MCACC indicator does not light when the MCACC preset memory currently being selected has not been corrected with Acoustic Calibration EQ  
Professional or when EQ is set to OFF in the Audio parameter menu (see Setting the Audio options on page 71).  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
04  
10 MCACC SETUP MIC jack  
Use to connect the supplied microphone.  
11 PHONES jack  
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are  
connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.  
12 Listening mode buttons  
AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT – Switches between  
Auto surround mode (Auto playback on page 30) and  
Stream Direct playback. Stream Direct playback  
bypasses the bass/treble controls for the most  
accurate reproduction of a source (page 32).  
SOUND RETRIEVER – Press to restore CD quality  
sound to compressed audio sources.  
STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard  
decoding and to switch between the various 2 Pro  
Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 30).  
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between  
the various surround modes (page 31).  
STEREO/A.L.C. – Switches between stereo playback,  
Auto level control stereo mode (page 31) and Front  
Stage Surround Advance modes (page 32).  
13 MULTI-ZONE controls  
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI-  
ZONE listening on page 60), use these controls to control  
the sub zone from the main zone (see Using the MULTI-  
ZONE controls on page 61).  
14 SPEAKERS  
Use to change the speaker system (page 58).  
15 ST +/–  
Use to select preset radio stations (page 36).  
Operating range of remote control unit  
The remote control may not work properly if:  
• There are obstacles between the remote control and  
the receiver’s remote sensor.  
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the  
remote sensor.  
• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting  
infrared rays.  
• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another  
infrared remote control unit.  
ST  
AN  
DB  
Y/  
ON  
30°  
30°  
7 m (23 ft.)  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
04  
Display  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
PHASE CONTROL DNR  
TUNED  
2
DIGITAL  
DTS  
2HD  
WMA9 Pro  
AUTO  
PCM  
L
C
S
R
MULTI-ZONE DIALOG E ATT OVER STEREO  
SL  
SR  
MONO  
DSD PCM  
SOUND  
S.RTRV  
V.SB  
dB  
HDMI  
SBL SB SBR  
LFE  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
TV  
DVD  
BDP DVR  
SIRIUS  
iPod  
VIDEO  
HDMI  
SR+  
CD  
CD-R  
TUNER  
USB XM  
[ 1 ]  
[ 2 ]  
STREAM DIRECT  
Neo : 6  
ADV.SURROUND  
STEREO  
2
PRO LOGIC  
STANDARD  
AB  
SP  
SLEEP  
13  
14  
15  
16 17  
18  
19  
1
SIGNAL indicators  
10 SOUND  
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal.  
AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input  
signal automatically (page 33).  
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or bass/treble  
controls feature is selected (page 71).  
11 Master volume level  
2
Program format indicators  
12 SR+  
These change according to which channels are active in  
digital sources.  
Lights when the SR+ mode is switched on (page 64).  
13 STREAM DIRECT  
L – Left front channel  
Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is selected (page 32).  
C – Center channel  
R – Right front channel  
SL – Left surround channel  
14 Speaker indicators  
Indicate the current speaker system,  
A
and/or  
B
(page 58).  
S – Surround channel (mono)  
SR – Right surround channel  
15 Listening mode indicators  
SBL – Left surround back channel  
SB – Surround back channel (mono)  
SBR – Right surround back channel  
LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the ((( ))) indicators light when  
an LFE signal is being input)  
ADV. SURROUND – Lights when an Advanced  
Surround mode has been selected (page 31).  
STEREO – Lights when the stereo mode is selected  
(page 31).  
3
Digital format indicators  
STANDARD – Lights when a Standard Surround  
mode is switched on (see Listening in surround  
sound on page 30).  
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format  
is detected (DSDPCM lights during the DSD (Direct  
Stream Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs).  
16 SLEEP  
4
S.RTRV  
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 74).  
Lights when the Sound Retriever is switched on  
(page 71).  
17 Matrix decoding format indicators  
2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2 Pro  
Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 30).  
5
MULTI-ZONE  
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 60).  
Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver  
is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing  
(page 30).  
6
PHASE CONTROL  
Lights when the Phase Control is switched on (page 12).  
7
Sound processing indicators  
18 Character display  
Displays various system information.  
Light according to the active Audio parameter(s)  
(page 71) and/or ANALOG ATT (page 74).  
19 Input source indicators  
Light to indicate the input source you have selected.  
8
V.SB  
Lights during Virtual surround back processing (page 34)  
.
9
TUNER indicators  
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.  
STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is  
being received in auto stereo mode.  
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using  
the MPX button.  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
Remote control  
04  
ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV or DTV,  
and also to select a disc in a multi-CD player.  
Press RECEIVER first to access:  
12  
13  
INPUT SELECT – Use to select the input source.  
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 74).  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
1
2
GENRE – Automatically selects the most appropriate  
Advanced Surround mode for the genre of the source  
currently being played back (this feature is available  
only when a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI  
Control is connected to this receiver via HDMI)  
(page 35).  
DVD  
DVR 1  
FM/AM  
BD  
DVR 2  
XM  
TV  
CD  
HDMI  
CD-R  
SIRIUS iPod USB  
INPUT  
SELECT  
DIMMER  
1
2
3
GENRE  
MCACC  
SLEEP  
MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets  
4
5
6
3
4
(page 32).  
SR+  
7
SBch  
8
A.ATT  
9
CLASS  
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and  
select the amount of time before sleep (page 74).  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
ENTER  
0
MASTER  
VOLUME  
INPUT  
SR+ – Switches the SR+ mode on/off (page 64).  
14  
15  
TV CONTROL  
SBch – Use to select the surround/virtual back  
channel mode (page 33).  
CH  
VOL  
MUTE  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an analog  
input signal to prevent distortion (page 74).  
EXIT  
TUNE TOOLS  
5
6
TOP MENU  
ST  
MENU  
T.EDIT  
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel,  
ENTER  
ST  
then use / to adjust the level (page 49).  
CATEGORY  
RETURN  
Press FM/AM first to access:  
SETUP TUNE  
iPod CTRL  
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can access a radio  
station directly using the number buttons (page 36).  
AUTO/  
STEREO/  
BD MENU  
DIRECT  
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
7
8
HDD  
CLASS – Switches between the three banks (classes)  
of radio station presets (page 36).  
THX  
STATUS  
PHASE  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
4
TV CONTROL buttons  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to  
the TV CTRL button. Thus if you only have one TV to hook  
up to this system assign it to the TV CTRL input source  
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV  
CTRL button (see page 77 for more on this).  
9
RECEIVER  
10  
16  
11  
MAIN  
ZONE  
2
TV– Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.  
INPUT – Use to select the TV input signal.  
CH +/– – Use to select channels.  
RECEIVER  
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according  
to component control using the following system (press  
the corresponding input source button to access):  
VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.  
5
Tuner/component control buttons/SETUP  
• White – Receiver controls (see below)  
These button controls can be accessed after you have  
selected the corresponding input source button (DVD,  
DVR1, TV, etc.). The T.EDIT tuner controls are explained  
from page 36.  
• Blue – Other controls (page 78)  
1
RECEIVER  
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.  
Press RECEIVER first to access:  
2
Input source buttons  
AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio  
options (page 71).  
Press to select control of other components (see  
Controlling the rest of your system on page 76).  
VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the Video  
options (page 72).  
3
Number buttons and other receiver/component  
controls  
SETUP – Use to access the System Setup menu  
(page 38).  
Use the number buttons to directly select a radio  
frequency (page 36) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
04  
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current  
menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu  
with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).  
10 TV CTRL  
Use this button to set preset code of your TV’s  
manufacturer when controlling TV (see Selecting preset  
codes directly on page 76 for more on this).  
6
/// (TUNE/ST) /ENTER  
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround  
sound system (page 38) and the Audio or Video options  
(page 71 or 72). Also used to control DVD menus/options  
and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player. Use the  
TUNE / buttons to find radio frequencies and use ST  
/ to find preset stations (page 36).  
11 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch  
Switch to perform operations in the main zone and zone  
2 (page 60).  
12 Remote control LED  
Lights when a command is sent from the remote control.  
13 SOURCE  
Press to turn on/off other components connected to the  
receiver (see page 76 for more on this).  
7
Receiver controls  
Press RECEIVER first to access:  
AUTO/DIRECT – Press to select Auto Surround  
(page 30) or Stream Direct (page 32) listening.  
14 MASTER VOLUME +/–  
Use to set the listening volume.  
STEREO/A.L.C. – Switches between the stereo  
playback mode (page 31) and the Front Stage  
Surround Advance mode (page 32).  
15 MUTE  
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been  
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).  
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to  
switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and  
Neo:6 options (page 30).  
16 RECEIVER  
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to  
select the white commands above the number buttons  
(A.ATT, etc.)). Also use this button to set up surround  
sound (page 10, page 38).  
ADV SURR – Use to switch among the various  
surround modes (page 31).  
8
Component control buttons  
The main buttons (, , etc.) are used to control a  
component after you have selected it using the input  
source buttons.  
Note  
• The THX button is not available for this receiver.  
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after  
you have selected the corresponding input source button  
(for example DVD, DVR1 or TV). These buttons also  
function as described below.  
Press RECEIVER first to access:  
STATUS – Press to check selected receiver settings  
(page 74).  
PHASE – Press to switch on/off Phase Control  
(page 12).  
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 33).  
Press TV first to access:  
ANT – Use to select the VHF/UHF antennas or Cable  
TV.  
Press FM/AM first to access:  
MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception  
of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak then switching  
to mono will improve the sound quality (page 36).  
9
AUDIO – Changes the audio or channel on DVD  
discs.  
DISPLAY – Switches between named station presets  
and radio frequencies (page 37).  
CH +/– – Use to select channels for DVD/DVR units.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
Chapter 5:  
Listening to your system  
If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using  
surround back channel processing on page 33.  
Important  
• The listening modes and many features described in  
this section may not be available depending on the  
current source, settings and status of the receiver.  
See Listening modes with different input signal  
formats on page 92 for more on this.  
Standard surround sound  
The following modes provide basic surround sound for  
3
stereo and multichannel sources.  
AUTO/  
STEREO/  
BD MENU  
DIRECT  
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
HDD  
THX  
STATUS  
PHASE  
Auto playback  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this  
receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option  
is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically  
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
RECEIVER  
1
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.  
•
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then  
press STANDARD STANDARD SURROUND).  
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.  
(
AUTO/  
STEREO/  
BD MENU  
DIRECT  
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
HDD  
THX  
STATUS  
PHASE  
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround  
encoded, the proper decoding format will  
automatically be selected and shows in the display.  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
4
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
RECEIVER  
With two channel sources, you can select from:  
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
especially suited to movie sources  
•
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then  
press AUTO/DIRECT AUTO SURR  
STREAM DIRECT 2  
for auto playback of a source.  
(
/
)
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
5
especially suited to music sources  
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before  
showing the decoding or playback format. Check the  
digital format indicators in the front panel display to see  
how the source is being processed.  
• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
especially suited to video games  
• 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound  
from the surround speakers is mono)  
• When listening to XM Radio, the XM HD Surround  
feature is selected automatically (see Using XM HD  
Surround on page 55 for more on this).  
• Neo:6 CINEMA – 6.1 channel sound, especially  
suited to movie sources  
• Neo:6 MUSIC – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited  
6
to music sources  
Listening in surround sound  
• XM HD Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in  
surround sound. However, the options available will  
depend on your speaker setup and the type of source  
you’re listening to.  
7
especially suited to music sources  
With multichannel sources, if you have connected  
surround back speaker(s) and have selected SBch ON, you  
can select (according to format):  
Note  
1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see Listening in surround sound above  
for more on these decoding formats).  
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones.  
2 For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 32.  
3 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.  
4 If surround back channel processing (page 33) is switched off, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if the Surround  
back speaker setting on page 41 is set to anything but Normal), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).  
5 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: C.WIDTH, DIMENSION, and  
PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 71 to adjust them.  
6 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio options  
on page 71).  
7 XM HD Surround can be selected only with the XM input.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only available  
when you’re using two surround back speakers)  
• EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo  
source, using all of your speakers  
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See page 30  
• PHONES SURROUND – When listening through  
headphones, you can still get the effect of overall  
surround.  
• Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel  
sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure  
decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital  
Surround EX)  
Tip  
• DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback  
with DTS-ES encoded sources  
• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is  
selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the  
EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on  
page 71.  
• DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback  
with DTS encoded sources  
Using the Advanced surround effects  
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety  
of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced  
Surround modes are designed to be used with film  
soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music  
sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks  
to see which you like.  
Listening in stereo  
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source  
through just the front left and right speakers (and  
possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker  
settings). Dolby Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro  
multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo.  
AUTO/  
STEREO/  
BD MENU  
In the Auto level control stereo mode (A.L.C.), this  
receiver equalizes playback sound levels if each sound  
level varies with the music source recorded in a portable  
audio player.  
DIRECT  
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
HDD  
THX  
STATUS  
PHASE  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
AUTO/  
STEREO/  
BD MENU  
DIRECT  
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
RECEIVER  
HDD  
THX  
STATUS  
PHASE  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
•
Press RECEIVER, then press ADV SURR  
(
ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to select a  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
listening mode.1  
RECEIVER  
• ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic  
soundtracks  
•
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then  
• DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog  
press STEREO/A.L.C. for stereo playback.  
• SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of  
special effects  
Press repeatedly to switch between:  
• STEREO – The audio is heard with your surround  
settings and you can still use the Midnight,  
Loudness, and bass/treble controls.  
• MONOFILM – Creates surround sound from mono  
soundtracks  
• ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources  
• A.L.C. – Listening in Auto level control stereo mode.  
2
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage Surround  
Advance below for more on this.  
• EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo field  
• TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both  
• F.S.SURR WIDE – See Using Front Stage Surround  
Advance below for more on this.  
mono and stereo TV sources  
• ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games  
• SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs  
• CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound  
• ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock  
and/or pop music  
• UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources  
Note  
1 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup. See Using  
surround back channel processing on page 33 for more on this.  
• If you press ADV SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURROUND mode will automatically be selected.  
2 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital sources).  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
Using Front Stage Surround Advance  
Using Stream Direct  
The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to  
create natural surround sound effects using just the front  
speakers and the subwoofer.  
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the  
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary  
signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the  
pure analog or digital sound source (see Stream direct  
with different input signal formats on page 96).  
AUTO/  
STEREO/  
BD MENU  
DIRECT  
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
HDD  
THX  
STATUS  
PHASE  
AUTO/  
STEREO/  
BD MENU  
DIRECT  
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
HDD  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
THX  
STATUS  
PHASE  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
RECEIVER  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
RECEIVER  
•
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then  
press STEREO/A.L.C. to select Front Stage Surround  
Advance modes.  
• STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for more on  
this.  
1
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then  
press AUTO/DIRECT AUTO SURR STREAM DIRECT) to  
select the mode you want.  
(
/
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel  
display to see how the source is being processed.  
• A.L.C. – See Listening in stereo above for more on  
this.  
• AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 30.  
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround  
sound effect directed to the center of where the front  
left and right speakers sound projection area  
converges.  
• DIRECT – Sources are heard according to the  
settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker  
setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic  
calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual  
mono, the input attenuator, any sound delay and hi-  
bit settings. You will hear sources according to the  
number of channels in the signal.  
• F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound  
1
effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.  
FOCUS position  
(Recommended)  
WIDE position  
• PURE DIRECT – Analog and PCM sources are heard  
2
without any digital processing. No sound is output  
Frontright  
speaker  
Front left  
speaker  
Frontright  
speaker  
Front left  
speaker  
from the Second Zone in this mode.  
Selecting MCACC presets  
• Default setting: MEMORY 1  
If you have calibrated your system for different listening  
3
positions , you can switch between settings to suit the  
kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting  
(for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a  
video game close to the TV).  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
INPUT  
SELECT  
DIMMER  
3
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
1
2
MCACC  
5
GENRE  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
4
6
SR+  
7
SBch  
A.ATT  
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
MAIN  
ZONE  
2
ENTER  
0
Note  
1 When using F.S.SURR WIDE, a better effect can be obtained if Auto MCACC Setup is performed. See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto  
MCACC) on page 10 for more on this.  
2 There are cases where a brief noise is heard before playback of sources other than PCM. Please select AUTO SURROUND or DIRECT if this is a problem.  
3 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system. These presets  
can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38, either of which you should  
have already completed.  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
•
While listening to a source, press RECEIVER, then  
press MCACC  
.
Using surround back channel  
1
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets  
or to switch calibration off. See Data Management on  
page 46 to check and manage your current settings.  
processing  
• Default setting: SBch ON  
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1  
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby  
Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use  
6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded  
material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back  
channel will be generated, but the material may sound  
better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally  
encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround  
back channel processing off).  
Choosing the input signal  
You need to hook up a component to both analog and  
digital inputs on the receiver to select between input  
2
signals.  
THX  
ANT  
STATUS  
PHASE  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
The table below indicates when you will hear the  
surround back channel when playing various kinds of  
sources (=Sound plays through surround back  
speaker(s)).  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
RECEIVER  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
•
Press RECEIVER, then press SIGNAL SEL to select  
1
GENRE  
4
2
MCACC  
5
3
SLEEP  
MEM  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
the input signal corresponding to the source  
component.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
6
A.ATT  
SR+  
SBch  
RECEIVER  
7
8
9
CLASS  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
ENTER  
0
• AUTO – This is the default setting. The receiver  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MAIN  
ZONE  
2
INPUT  
selects the first available signal in the following order:  
HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.  
•
Press RECEIVER, then press SBch repeatedly to  
cycle the surround back channel options.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
• ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.  
• DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.  
• SBch ON – 6.1 or 7.1 decoding is always used (for  
example, a surround back channel will be generated  
for 5.1 encoded material)  
3
• HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.  
4
• PCM – Only PCM signals are output.  
• SBch AUTO – Automatically switches to 6.1 or 7.1  
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example,  
Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)  
When set to DIGITAL or AUTO, 2 DIGITAL lights with  
Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus decoding, 2 HD  
lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding, DTS lights with DTS  
or DTS-HD decoding, and WMA9 Pro lights to indicate  
that a WMA9 Pro signal is being decoded.  
• SBch OFF – No sound is output from the surround  
back speakers  
Note  
1 • These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.  
• You can also press / to select the MCACC preset.  
2 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96 kHz/24 bit) and WMA9 Pro digital signal formats. The  
compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, WMA 9 Pro, PCM (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz sampling frequencies), Dolby  
TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio, SACD and DVD Audio (including 192 kHz). With other digital signal formats, set to  
ANALOG (the MULTI CH IN and FM/AM).  
• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections  
(page 19) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.  
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.  
3 When the HDMI option in Setting the Audio options on page 71 is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.  
4 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.  
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
•
Press SBch repeatedly to cycle the virtual surround  
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode  
When you’re not using surround back speakers,  
back channel options.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround  
back channel through your surround speakers. You can  
choose to listen to sources with no surround back  
channel information, or if the material sounds better in  
the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally  
encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect  
• VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is always used  
(for example, on 5.1 encoded material)  
• VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back is  
automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for  
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)  
1
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.  
• VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back mode is  
switched off  
The table indicates when you will hear the virtual  
surround back channel (=Virtual surround back  
channel is active).  
Standard  
SBch  
Processing /  
Virtual SB  
mode  
Advanced  
Stereo sources  
Type of source  
Multichannel  
surround  
sources  
2
Pro Logic IIx 2 Pro Logic  
Neo:6  
Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES 5.1 ch  
sources with 6.1 ch flagged  
ON  
AUTO  
ON  
Dolby Digital/DTS/SACD and DVD-  
Audio 5.1 ch sources  
AUTO  
ON  
a
Dolby Digital/DTS/PCM/SACD/WMA9  
Pro and DVD-Audio stereo sources  
b
AUTO  
ON  
a
Analog 2-channel (stereo) sources  
b
AUTO  
ON  
c
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/Dolby  
Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9 Pro  
encoded and PCM 6.1 ch/7.1 ch  
sources  
c
AUTO  
c
c
c
c
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/  
WMA9 Pro encoded and PCM 5.1 ch  
sources  
ON  
AUTO  
ON  
d
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/  
DTS-EXPRESS encoded 5.1 ch  
sources  
d
AUTO  
Note  
1 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo, Front Stage Surround  
Advance, Auto level control stereo or Stream Direct mode is selected.  
• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO in the Speaker Setting on page 48.  
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
Standard  
Stereo sources  
SBch  
Processing /  
Virtual SB  
mode  
Advanced  
surround  
Type of source  
Multichannel  
sources  
2
Pro Logic IIx 2 Pro Logic  
Neo:6  
a
c
Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD  
encoded stereo sources  
ON  
b
c
AUTO  
DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/  
DTS-EXPRESS encoded stereo  
sources  
ON  
AUTO  
a.Only applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.  
b.Not applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.  
c.Advanced surround mode may not be available depending on the input signal.  
d.Only applicable when two surround back speakers are connected. Also, depending on the input signal, it may happen that no sound is output from the  
surround back speakers.  
Using the genre synchronizing function  
This feature automatically selects the most appropriate  
Advanced Surround mode for the source currently being  
played back on a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI  
1
Control connected to this receiver via HDMI. For details  
on HDMI Control, see About HDMI Control on page 66.  
MEM  
INPUT  
SELECT  
DIMMER  
3
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
CH  
1
2
MCACC  
5
GENRE  
SLEEP  
TV CTRL  
RECEIVER  
4
6
SR+  
7
SBch  
A.ATT  
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
MAIN  
ZONE  
2
ENTER  
0
1
Press RECEIVER, then press GENRE while the source  
assigned to a genre is being played back.  
The most appropriate Advanced Surround mode for the  
source being played back is automatically selected.  
Note  
1 • This feature is available only when the source being played back is assigned to a genre. When the source has no genre assigned to, NO GENRE appears  
showing that this feature is not available.  
• Make sure that HDMI Control is set to ON. When OFF is selected, CANNOT SELECT appears showing that this feature is not available (see Setting the  
HDMI options on page 65).  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the tuner  
06  
Chapter 6:  
Using the tuner  
1
2
Press the FM/AM button to select the tuner.  
Listening to the radio  
Use the FM/AM button to change the band (FM or  
AM), if necessary.  
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.  
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and  
AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and  
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the  
frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a  
station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can  
memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving  
station presets below for more on how to do this.  
3
Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).  
4
Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of  
the radio station.  
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.  
If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS  
twice to cancel the frequency and start over.  
AUTO/  
STEREO/  
BD MENU  
FM/AM  
XM  
SIRIUS iPod USB  
DIRECT  
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
HDD  
EXIT  
TUNE TOOLS  
INPUT  
SELECT  
THX  
STATUS  
PHASE  
DIMMER  
TOP MENU  
ST  
MENU  
T.EDIT  
1
GENRE  
2
3
SLEEP  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
MCACC  
ENTER  
ST  
4
SR+  
7
5
6
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
SBch  
8
A.ATT  
Saving station presets  
CATEGORY  
RETURN  
9
RECEIVER  
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s  
convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for  
easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.  
This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This  
receiver can memorize up to 30 stations, stored in three  
banks, or classes (A, B and C) of 10 stations each. When  
saving an FM frequency, the MPX setting (see above) is  
also stored.  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
SETUP TUNE  
iPod CTRL  
ENTER  
0
MASTER  
1
2
Press the FM/AM button to select the tuner.  
Use the FM/AM button to change the band (FM or  
AM), if necessary.  
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.  
3
Tune to a station.  
There are three ways to do this:  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
4
SR+  
7
5
SBch  
8
6
A.ATT  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
EXIT  
TUNE TOOLS  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
9
CLASS  
TOP MENU  
ST  
MENU  
T.EDIT  
Automatic tuning  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
ENTER  
0
To search for stations in the currently selected band,  
press and hold TUNE / for about a second. The  
receiver will start searching for the next station,  
stopping when it has found one. Repeat to search for  
other stations.  
ENTER  
ST  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
CATEGORY  
RETURN  
TV CONTROL  
SETUP TUNE  
1
Tune to a station you want to memorize.  
See Listening to the radio above for more on this.  
Manual tuning  
To change the frequency one step at a time, press  
TUNE /.  
2
Press T.EDIT (Tuner Edit).  
The display shows STATION MEMORY, then a blinking  
memory class.  
High speed tuning  
Press and hold TUNE / for high speed tuning.  
Release the button at the frequency you want.  
3
Press CLASS to select one of the three classes, then  
press ST / to select the station preset you want.  
You can also use the number buttons to select a station  
preset.  
Improving FM stereo sound  
4
Press ENTER.  
If the TUNED or STEREO indicators don’t light when  
tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press  
the MPX button to switch the receiver into mono  
reception mode. This should improve the sound quality  
and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.  
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop  
blinking and the receiver stores the station.  
Tuning directly to a station  
Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of the  
station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply  
enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on  
the remote control.  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the tuner  
06  
Naming station presets  
For easier identification, you can name your station  
presets.  
1
Choose the station preset you want to name.  
See Listening to station presets below for how to do this.  
2
Press T.EDIT (Tuner Edit).  
The display shows STATION NAME, then a blinking  
cursor at the first character position.  
3
Input the name you want.  
Choose from the following characters for a name up to  
four characters long.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
!”#$%&’()∗+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]^_{|} ˜ [space]  
Use / to select a character, / to set the position,  
and ENTER to confirm your selection.  
Tip  
• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3  
and input four spaces instead of a name.  
• Once you have named a station preset, you can press  
DISPLAY when listening to a station to switch the  
display between name and frequency.  
Listening to station presets  
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See  
Saving station presets on page 36 if you haven’t done this  
already.  
1
Press FM/AM to select the tuner.  
2
Press CLASS to select the class in which the station  
is stored.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.  
3
Press ST / to select the station preset you  
want.  
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote  
control to recall the station preset.  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
Chapter 7:  
The System Setup menu  
• Surround Back System – Specifies how you are  
using your surround back speakers (see Surround  
back speaker setting on page 41).  
Making receiver settings from the  
System Setup menu  
• Manual MCACC – Fine tunes your speaker settings  
and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see  
Manual MCACC setup on page 41).  
The following section shows you how to make detailed  
settings to specify how you’re using the receiver (for  
example, if you want to set up two speaker systems in  
separate rooms), and also explains how to fine-tune  
individual speaker system settings to your liking.  
• Data Management – Checks your MCACC presets  
and manages them through copying, renaming or  
deleting (see Data Management on page 46).  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
EXIT  
TUNE TOOLS  
MEM  
• Manual SP Setup – Specifies the size, number,  
distance and overall balance of the speakers you’ve  
connected (see Manual speaker setup on page 48).  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
CH  
TOP MENU  
ST  
MENU  
T.EDIT  
TV CTRL  
RECEIVER  
ENTER  
ST  
DVD  
DVR 1  
FM/AM  
BD  
DVR 2  
XM  
TV  
CD  
HDMI  
CD-R  
CATEGORY  
RETURN  
• Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to  
the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see  
The Input Setup menu on page 67).  
SETUP TUNE  
MAIN  
ZONE  
2
SIRIUS iPod USB  
iPod CTRL  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
• Other Setup – Makes customized settings to reflect  
how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup  
menu on page 68).  
1
Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.  
• If headphones are connected to the receiver,  
disconnect them.  
2
Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press  
Automatic MCACC (Expert)  
the SETUP 2  
.
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those  
provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(Auto MCACC) on page 10, you can customize your setup  
options below. You can calibrate your system differently  
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /  
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens  
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and  
exit the current menu.  
3
for up to six different MCACC presets , which are useful  
• Press SETUP at any time to exit the System Setup  
menu.  
if you have different listening positions depending on the  
type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa,  
3
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
4
or playing a video game close to the TV).  
System Setup MENU  
1 . Auto MCACC  
Important  
2 . Surround Back System  
3 . Manual MCACC  
4 . Data Management  
5 . Manual SP Setup  
6 . Input Setup  
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved  
during the Auto MCACC Setup.  
7 . Other Setup  
:Exit  
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any  
5
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.  
• Auto MCACC – See Automatically setting up for  
surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10 for a quick  
and effective automatic surround setup. See  
Automatic MCACC (Expert) below for a more detailed  
setup.  
• The screen saver will automatically appear after three  
minutes of inactivity.  
Caution  
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are  
output at high volume.  
Note  
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.  
2 • Note that when editing items in the Manual MCACC menu, you will need to first specify the MCACC preset you want to adjust by pressing MCACC  
before pressing SETUP.  
• You can’t use the System Setup menu when the iPod USB, XM or SIRIUS Radio input source is selected (in either the main or sub zone). When you  
set ZONE 2 to ON (page 61), you can’t use the System Setup menu.  
3 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1–6 (or M1–6) until you rename them in Data Management on page 46.  
4 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.  
5 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the CUSTOM setup screen (step 2).  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
1
Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the System Setup menu,  
• Stand.Wave Multi-Point (only available when the  
Custom Menu above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – In  
addition to measurements at the listening position,  
you can use two more reference points for which test  
tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is  
useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration  
then press ENTER  
.
If the System Setup screen is not displayed, refer to  
Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on  
page 38.  
System Setup MENU  
1.Auto MCACC  
8
for several seating positions in your listening area.  
1 . Auto MCACC  
Surround Back System  
2 . Surround Back System  
3 . Manual MCACC  
4 . Data Management  
5 . Manual SP Setup  
6 . Input Setup  
[
Normal  
]
Place the microphone at the reference point  
indicated on-screen and note the last microphone  
placement will be at your main listening position:  
Save SYMMETRY to  
[
M1.MEMORY  
1
]
7 . Other Setup  
START  
:Exit  
ENTER:Start  
:Cancel  
3rd reference  
point  
2nd reference  
point  
2
Make sure ‘Normal’ is selected,1 select an MCACC  
preset2, then select START 3  
.
1
2
For a fully customized Auto MCACC setup, select  
CUSTOM and set the following parameters using /:  
4
3
1.Auto MCACC  
1.Auto MCACC  
1.Auto MCACC  
Main listening  
position  
Surround Back System  
Custom Menu  
SYMMETRY  
M1.MEMORY  
ALL CH ADJ  
[
Normal  
]
ALL  
1
2
3
Save SYMMETRY to  
Speaker Setting  
Channel Level  
Speaker Distance  
[
M2.MEMORY  
]
]
[
M1.MEMORY  
CUSTOM  
1
]
FRONT ALIGN  
[
M3.MEMORY  
When you’re finished settings the options, press  
RETURN to go back to the Auto MCACC main setup.  
EQ Pro.  
&
S-Wave  
[
START  
]
:Cancel  
:Return  
ENTER:Next  
ENTER:Next  
ENTER:Start  
:Return  
3
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC  
• Custom Menu – The default is ALL (recommended),  
jack on the front panel.  
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers  
and the microphone.  
but you can limit the system calibration to only one  
5
setting (to save time) if you want. The available  
6
options are ALL, Keep SP System, Speaker  
AUTO SURR/  
SOUND  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
STEREO/  
A.L.C.  
STREAM DIRECT RETRIEVER  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
iPod DIRECT  
USB  
MCACC  
SSEETUP MIC  
VIDEO  
L
R
DIGITAL IN  
Setting, Channel Level, Speaker Distance and EQ  
PHONES  
MULTI-ZONE  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
SPEAKERS  
ST  
–
ST  
+
Pro. & S-Wave.  
• EQ Type (only available when the Custom Menu  
above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – This determines how  
the frequency balance is adjusted.  
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that  
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position.  
Otherwise, place the microphone at ear level using a  
table or a chair.  
After a single calibration is performed, each of the  
following three correction curves can be stored  
separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY (default)  
implements symmetric correction for each pair of left  
and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude  
characteristics. ALL CH ADJUST is a ‘flat’ setting where  
all the speakers are set individually so no special  
4
Follow the instructions on-screen.  
• Make sure the microphone is connected.  
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically  
detected every time you switch on the system. Make  
sure it is on and the volume is turned up.  
7
weighting is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN  
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on  
page 11 for notes regarding high background noise  
levels and other possible interference.  
sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker  
settings (no equalization is applied to the front left and  
right channels).  
Note  
1 If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker setting  
on page 41 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 3.  
2 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can  
rename it later in Data Management on page 46).  
3 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJUST and  
FRONT ALIGN).  
4 Select DEMO, and then press ENTER to activate the demo mode of Auto MCACC. In the demo mode, no settings are saved and no errors occur. When  
the speakers are connected to this receiver, the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test tone.  
5 • The EQ Pro. & S-Wave measurement is also taken when ALL is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 44 for more on this.  
• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For details, see  
Setting the Audio options on page 71.  
6 The Keep SP System option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 48) unchanged.  
7 If you selected ALL as your Custom Menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN settings.  
8 Switch the Multi-Point setting NO if you only use one listening position.  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
5
Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish  
7
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.  
outputting test tones.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the  
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker  
distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers  
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while  
it’s doing this.  
1.Auto MCACC  
Now Analyzing  
1.Auto MCACC  
Now Analyzing  
• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This  
may result in incorrect speaker settings.  
…
…
(6/9)  
Subwoofer Check  
Surround Analysis  
Speaker System  
Channel Level  
[
[
[
OK  
OK  
]
]
]
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient  
noise! or Check Microphone) select RETRY after  
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when  
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 11) and  
verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to  
be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and  
continue.  
Speaker Distance  
:Cancel  
:Cancel  
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is  
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.  
• If you selected a Stand.Wave Multi-Point setup (in  
step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd  
and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at  
your main listening position.  
6
If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in  
the OSD.1  
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the  
actual speakers you have.  
8
The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press RETURN  
to go back to the System Setup menu.  
1.Auto MCACC  
Now Analyzing  
1.Auto MCACC  
CHECK!  
4a.MCACC Data Check  
…
(2/9)  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
SB  
[
[
[
YES  
YES  
YES  
]
]
]
]
]
1 . Speaker Setting  
2 . Channel Level  
3 . Speaker Distance  
4 . Standing Wave  
5 . Acoustic Cal EQ  
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
[
[
[
OK  
]
]
]
[
[
YES  
YES  
x
2
SW  
Speaker YES/NO  
OK  
:Cancel  
10  
:Cancel  
:Return  
ENTER:Next  
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the  
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,  
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this  
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in  
step 7.  
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give  
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is  
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the  
2
System Setup menu (starting on page 38).  
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting  
individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check  
screen:  
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side  
column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t  
correct), there may be a problem with the speaker  
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the  
power and check the speaker connections. If there  
doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use /  
to select the speaker and / to change the setting  
(and number for surround back) and continue.  
• Speaker Setting – The size and number of speakers  
you’ve connected (see page 48 for more on this)  
• Channel Level – The overall balance of your speaker  
system (see page 49 for more on this)  
• Speaker Distance – The distance of your speakers  
from the listening position (see page 50 for more on  
3
this)  
• Standing Wave – Filter settings to control lower  
‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 43 for more on this)  
• Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the frequency  
balance of your speaker system based on the  
acoustic characteristics of your room (see page 44  
for more on this)  
Note  
1 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting in Custom Menu from the Auto MCACC CUSTOM menu.  
2 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with different size  
settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 48.  
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and  
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.  
3 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are cases where (for optimal surround  
sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
Press ENTER after you have finished checking each  
screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back  
to the System Setup menu.  
Manual MCACC setup  
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup  
menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more  
familiar with the system. Before making these settings,  
you should have already completed Automatically setting  
up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10.  
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver  
upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.  
Surround back speaker setting  
You only need to make these settings once (unless you  
change the placement of your current speaker system or  
add new speakers).  
• Default setting: Normal  
There are several ways you can use the surround back  
speaker channels with this system. In addition to a  
normal home theater setup where they are used for the  
surround back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping  
the front speakers or as an independent speaker system  
in another room.  
Caution  
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at  
high volume.  
1
Select ‘Surround Back System’ from the System  
Important  
Setup menu.  
• You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you  
want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing  
SETUP (step 2 in Making receiver settings from the  
System Setup menu on page 38). When Manual  
MCACC is selected while MCACC is set to OFF, the  
selection screen for the MCACC memory appears.  
Select a memory to adjust manually.  
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
on page 38 if you’re not already at this screen.  
System Setup MENU  
2.Surround Back System  
Normal  
1 . Auto MCACC  
2 . Surround Back System  
3 . Manual MCACC  
4 . Data Management  
5 . Manual SP Setup  
6 . Input Setup  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
:
:
:
:
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
SB  
7 . Other Setup  
:Exit  
:Finish  
3.Manual MCACC  
Select MCACC memory.  
2
Select the surround back speaker setting.  
• Normal – Select for normal home theater use with  
surround back speakers in your main (speaker  
system A) setup.  
MCACC OFF  
M1.MEMORY  
1
:Cancel  
ENTER:Next  
• Speaker B – Select to use the (surround back) B  
speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in  
another room (see Speaker B setup on page 58).  
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect  
the setup microphone to the front panel and place it  
about ear level at your normal listening position.  
Press SETUP to display the System Setup menu  
before you connect the microphone to this receiver. If  
the microphone is connected while the System Setup  
menu is not being displayed, the display will change  
to the Auto MCACC setup menu. See Problems when  
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 11 for notes  
regarding high background noise levels and other  
possible interference.  
• Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-  
amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your front  
speakers on page 59).  
• ZONE 2 – Select to use the (surround back) B  
speaker terminals for an independent system in  
another zone (see MULTI-ZONE listening on page 60).  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the System Setup menu.  
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up  
the volume to the middle position.  
1
Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the System Setup  
menu.  
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
on page 38 if you’re not already at this screen.  
System Setup MENU  
3.Manual MCACC  
1 . Auto MCACC  
a . Fine Channel Level  
b . Fine SP Distance  
c . Standing Wave  
d . EQ Adjust  
2 . Surround Back System  
3 . Manual MCACC  
4 . Data Management  
5 . Manual SP Setup  
6 . Input Setup  
e . EQ Professional  
7 . Other Setup  
:Exit  
:Return  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels  
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to  
make these settings in order.  
(+/–10dB) as necessary.  
Use / to adjust the volume of the speaker you  
selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds  
like both tones are the same volume, press to confirm  
and continue to the next channel.  
• Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments to the  
overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine  
Channel Level on page 42).  
• Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for  
your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on  
page 42).  
3a.Fine Channel Level  
R
L
L
R
C
+0.5dB  
-1.5dB] SBL  
+1.0dB] SBR [ +10.0dB]  
-9.5dB] SW  
[
[
[
[
-9.5dB]  
SL  
[
-1.5dB]  
• Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low  
frequencies in your listening room (see Standing  
Wave on page 43).  
SR [ +10.0dB]  
:Finish  
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will  
change depending on which speaker you select.  
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the  
parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust  
on page 43:  
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply  
use / to select it.  
• EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance  
of your speaker system while listening to test tones  
(see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 43).  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
• EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on  
the direct sound coming from the speakers and make  
detailed settings according to your room’s reverb  
characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ  
Professional on page 44).  
Fine Speaker Distance  
• Default setting: 10’00’’ (all speakers)  
For proper sound depth and separation with your system,  
it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some  
speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening  
position at the same time. You can adjust the distance of  
each speaker in 1 inch increments. The following setting  
can help you make detailed adjustments that you may  
not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 48.  
Fine Channel Level  
• Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)  
You can achieve better surround sound by properly  
adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. The  
following setting can help you make detailed  
adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual  
speaker setup on page 48.  
1
Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC  
setup menu.  
3.Manual MCACC  
3b.Fine SP Distance  
1
Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the Manual  
a . Fine Channel Level  
b . Fine SP Distance  
c . Standing Wave  
d . EQ Adjust  
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY  
1
MCACC setup menu.  
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.  
Ref.Ch  
:
'
L
00 "  
10  
e . EQ Professional  
3.Manual MCACC  
3a.Fine Channel Level  
:Return  
ENTER:Next  
:Cancel  
a . Fine Channel Level  
b . Fine SP Distance  
c . Standing Wave  
d . EQ Adjust  
Please wait...  
CAUTION  
20  
e . EQ Professional  
2
Adjust the distance of the left channel from the  
Loud test tones will  
be output.  
listening position.  
:Return  
:Cancel  
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance  
as necessary.  
2
Adjust the level of the left channel.  
Use / to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected  
to match the reference speaker. The delay is measured in  
terms of speaker distance from 0’01’’ to 45’00’’.  
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want  
to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty  
of room to adjust the other speaker levels.  
3b.Fine SP Distance  
SL  
3b.Fine SP Distance  
SBL SL  
6 ' 02 "  
3a.Fine Channel Level  
L
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY  
1
L
R
10  
'
'
'
'
'
10 "  
11 "  
10 "  
08 "  
09 "  
SBL  
SBR  
SW  
[
[
9
10  
9
]
]
[
[
6 ' 03 "  
12 ' 01 "  
]
]
C
Ref.Ch  
:
L
SL  
SR  
+0.5dB  
[
9
]
:Finish  
:Finish  
ENTER:Next  
:Cancel  
• After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the  
target channel. From the listening position, face the two  
speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each  
speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are  
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of  
2
Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave  
Control.  
• Filter Ch – Select the channel to which you will apply  
the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel and  
subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).  
1
you and between your arm span.  
• TRIM (only available when Filter Ch above is SW) –  
Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to compensate  
for the difference in output post-filter).  
• f / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where f  
represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q  
is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the  
bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation (ATT, the  
amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).  
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up,  
press to confirm and continue to the next channel.  
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will  
change depending on which speaker you select.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply  
use / to select it.  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust  
• Default setting: ON /0.0dB (all channels/bands)  
2
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer  
for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It works by  
measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and  
neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can color the  
original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equalization  
setting). If you’re not satisfied with the adjustment provided  
in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto  
MCACC) on page 10 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on  
page 38, you can also adjust these settings manually to get  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
Standing Wave  
2
• Default setting: ON /ATT 0.0dB (all filters)  
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain  
conditions, sound waves from your speaker system  
resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the  
walls in your listening area. This can have a negative  
effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower  
frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your  
listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room,  
it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The  
Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of  
overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During  
playback of a source, you can customize the filters used  
for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC  
4
a frequency balance that suits your tastes.  
1
Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup  
menu.  
3.Manual MCACC  
a . Fine Channel Level  
b . Fine SP Distance  
c . Standing Wave  
d . EQ Adjust  
e . EQ Professional  
3
presets.  
:Return  
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC  
2
Confirm that the MCACC preset shown in the display  
setup menu.  
is the one you want to adjust, then select START  
.
3.Manual MCACC  
3c.Standing Wave  
MCACC M1. MEMORY  
3d.EQ Adjust  
a . Fine Channel Level  
b . Fine SP Distance  
c . Standing Wave  
d . EQ Adjust  
:
1
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY  
1
Filter Ch  
TRIM  
SW  
+12.0dB]  
[
e . EQ Professional  
No.  
f
Q
1
63Hz  
3.0  
2
3
[
[
]
]
]
[
[
[
110Hz  
8.0  
6.0dB  
]
]
]
[
[
[
250Hz  
5.0  
6.0dB  
]
]
]
[
START  
]
ATT [ 2.5dB  
:Return  
:Finish  
ENTER:Next  
:Cancel  
Note  
1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.  
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be difficult to  
compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).  
2 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave Control and Acoustic Cal EQ feature in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. See Setting the Audio options on  
page 71 for more on this.  
3 • Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup to another MCACC preset.  
• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.  
• When Standing Wave is selected for a MCACC preset memory where S-WAVE is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER, S-WAVE ON is automatically  
selected.  
4 When EQ Adjust is selected for a MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER, EQ ON is automatically selected.  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
3
Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your  
How to interpret the graphical output  
liking.  
The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time (in  
milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line  
indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a  
sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when  
outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually  
flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this  
usually takes about 100 ms or so).  
3d.EQ Adjust  
MCACC  
Ch  
:
M1  
63Hz  
125Hz  
250Hz  
500Hz  
1kHz  
[
[
[
[
0.0]  
0.0]  
0.0]  
0.0]  
0.0  
[SBL]  
dB  
2kHz  
4kHz  
8kHz  
16kHz  
[
[
[
[
0.0]  
0.0]  
0.0]  
0.0]  
TRIM [ 0.0]  
:Finish  
By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how  
your room is responding to certain frequencies.  
Use / to select the channel.  
Use / to select the frequency and / to boost or  
cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of  
the screen and use / to select the next channel.  
• The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the  
frequency adjustment is too drastic and might  
distort. If this happens, bring the level down until  
OVER! disappears from the display.  
Differences in channel level and speaker distance are  
taken into account automatically (compensation is  
provided for comparison purposes), and the frequency  
measurements can be examined both with and without  
2
the equalization performed by this receiver.  
Setting Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
according to your room characteristics  
Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at  
which the frequency response is analyzed, pinpointing  
the time that is best for system calibration with your  
particular room characteristics.  
Tip  
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too  
drastically will affect the overall balance. If the  
speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or  
lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM  
feature. Use / to select TRIM, then use / to  
raise or lower the channel level for the current  
speaker.  
The graph below shows the difference between  
conventional acoustic calibration and professional  
calibration (the gray circle indicates the point where the  
microphone captures sound during frequency analysis).  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
Level  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
Test tone  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.  
ConventionalMCACC  
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room  
reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system  
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. It  
can also provide you with a graphical output of the  
calibration range  
EQ calibration range  
Time  
(in msec)  
0
80  
160  
As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it  
is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls,  
furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner  
the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the  
room. We recommend an earlier time setting of  
30~50ms to compensate for two major factors that will  
influence the sound of most rooms:  
1
frequency response of your room.  
How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant  
in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’), or that  
different channels seem to exhibit different reverb  
characteristics, select EQ Pro. & S-Wave (or ALL) for the  
Custom Menu setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on  
page 38 to calibrate the room automatically. This should  
provide a balanced calibration that suits the  
• Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies –  
Depending on your room, you may find that lower  
frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to  
higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’).  
This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the  
measurement is done too late.  
characteristics of your listening room.  
If you still aren’t satisfied with the results, the manual  
Advanced EQ setup (below) provides a more customized  
calibration of your system using the direct sound of the  
speakers. This is done with the help of a graphical output  
that can be displayed on-screen.  
Note  
1 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen.  
2 Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies (this is most obvious when  
comparing the frequencies at 0 ms). This initial slope is not a problem (i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
• Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time  
period that will be used for frequency adjustment and  
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of  
your listening area. Note that customizing system  
calibration using this setup will alter the settings you  
made in Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(Auto MCACC) on page 10 or Automatic MCACC  
(Expert) on page 38 and is not necessary if you’re  
satisfied with these settings.  
Low  
Level  
frequencies  
High  
frequencies  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.  
calibration range  
ConventionalMCACC  
EQ calibration range  
Time  
(in msec)  
0
80  
160  
• Reverb characteristics for different channels –  
Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for  
each channel. Since this difference increases as the  
sound is influenced by the various room  
characteristics, it is often better to capture a  
frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of  
channel frequencies/sounds.  
3
If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ  
ON or OFF, then START  
.
3e1.Reverb Measurement  
MCACC M1.MEMORY  
Measure with  
3e1.Reverb Measurement  
…
:
1
Now Analyzing  
(2/5)  
EQ OFF  
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
[
[
[
OK  
]
]
]
[
START  
]
Speaker Level  
Left  
surround  
Level  
:Cancel  
:Cancel  
Right  
surround  
The following options determine how the reverb  
characteristics of your listening area are displayed in  
Reverb View:  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.  
calibration range  
ConventionalMCACC  
EQ calibration range  
• EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of  
your listening area without the equalization  
performed by this receiver (before calibration).  
Time  
(in msec)  
0
80  
160  
If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often  
not necessary to make a 30~50ms setting. Later time  
settings may provide a more detailed sound experience  
with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what  
works best for your particular room.  
• EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of  
your listening area with the equalization performed  
2
by this receiver (after calibration). Note that the EQ  
response may not appear entirely flat due to  
adjustments necessary for your listening area.  
Note that changing the room (for example, moving  
furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results.  
In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.  
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select  
Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 84  
for troubleshooting information.  
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
1
Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.  
4
If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the  
reverb characteristics for each channel. Press RETURN  
when you’re done.  
3.Manual MCACC  
3 e.EQ Professional  
a . Fine Channel Level  
b . Fine SP Distance  
c . Standing Wave  
d . EQ Adjust  
1.Reverb Measurement  
2.Reverb View  
3.Advanced EQ Setup  
3e2.Reverb View  
e . EQ Professional  
M1  
Ch  
:
EQ OFF  
L
Fq  
[
125Hz ]  
dB  
:Return  
ENTER:Next  
:Return  
0
80  
160ms  
:Return  
2
Select an option and press ENTER  
.
• Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the  
reverb characteristics of your room.  
This appears according to the setting you chose in  
Reverb Measurement (step 3 on page 45). Use / to  
select the channel and the frequency you want to check.  
Use /to go back and forth between the two. Note that  
the markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB  
steps.  
• Reverb View – You can check the reverb  
measurements made for specified frequency ranges  
1
in each channel.  
Note  
1 If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10 or Reverb Measurement  
operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC function, the reverberations  
are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves  
eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the standing waves, so the graph indicates the  
reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves  
as such), we recommend using the Reverb Measurement function.  
2 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset, exit the  
System Setup menu and press MCACC to select it before pressing SETUP.  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
5
If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, enter the  
desired time setting for calibration. Press  
to the next screen, and then select START  
to proceed  
Data Management  
.
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets,  
allowing you to calibrate your system for different  
listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the  
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can  
choose the time period that will be used for the final  
frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you  
can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is  
best to use the measurement results as a reference for  
your time setting. For an optimal system calibration  
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we  
recommend using the 30~50ms setting.  
1
same listening position). This is useful for alternate  
settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to  
and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies  
from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).  
From this menu you can check your current settings,  
copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier  
identification and clear any ones you don’t need.  
3e3.Adv. EQ Setup  
(1/2)  
3e3.Adv. EQ Setup  
(2/2)  
1
Ch  
L
L
Fq  
Tm  
[
[
125Hz ]  
30-50ms ]  
MCACC  
EQ Type  
:
M1.MEMORY  
[
SYMMETRY  
]
Stand Wave Multi  
-
Point  
YES  
dB  
1
Select ‘Data Management’ from the System Setup  
[
]
Place the mic at your  
2nd reference point.  
menu.  
[
START  
]
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
on page 38 if you’re not already at this screen.  
0
80  
160ms  
:Cancel  
ENTER:Start  
:Cancel  
Use / to select the channel, frequency, and time  
System Setup MENU  
4.Data Management  
setting. Use / to switch between them.  
1 . Auto MCACC  
a . MCACC Data Check  
b . Memory Rename  
c . MCACC Memory Copy  
d . MCACC Memory Clear  
2 . Surround Back System  
3 . Manual MCACC  
4 . Data Management  
5 . Manual SP Setup  
6 . Input Setup  
You can switch between your connected speakers  
(excluding the subwoofer), and display the  
measurements for the following frequencies: 63Hz,  
125Hz, 250Hz, 500Hz, 1kHz, 2kHz, 4kHz, 8kHz and  
16kHz.  
7 . Other Setup  
:Exit  
:Return  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
Select the setting from the following time periods (in  
milliseconds): 0~20ms, 10~30ms, 20~40ms, 30~50ms,  
40~60ms, 50~70ms and 60~80ms. This setting will be  
applied to all channels during calibration.  
• MCACC Data Check – Checks the settings for any of  
your MCACC presets using the on-screen display  
(see Checking MCACC preset data on page 47).  
• Memory Rename – Names your MCACC presets for  
easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets on  
page 47).  
When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2  
to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.  
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are  
given the option to check the settings on-screen.  
• MCACC Memory Copy – Copies settings from one  
MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC  
preset data on page 47).  
• MCACC Memory Clear – Clears any MCACC presets  
that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets on  
page 47).  
Note  
1 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38, either of which you  
should have already completed.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
Checking MCACC preset data  
Copying MCACC preset data  
After you have completed Automatically setting up for  
surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10 or Automatic  
MCACC (Expert) on page 38, you can check your  
calibrated settings using the on-screen display.  
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration  
EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 41), we  
1
recommend copying your current settings to an unused  
MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will  
give you a reference point from which to start.  
1
Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
4.Data Management  
4a.MCACC Data Check  
a . MCACC Data Check  
b . Memory Rename  
c . MCACC Memory Copy  
d . MCACC Memory Clear  
1 . Speaker Setting  
2 . Channel Level  
3 . Speaker Distance  
4 . Standing Wave  
5 . Acoustic Cal EQ  
4.Data Management  
4c.MCACC Memory Copy  
Copy  
a . MCACC Data Check  
b . Memory Rename  
c . MCACC Memory Copy  
d . MCACC Memory Clear  
All Data  
From  
All Data  
[
[
M1. MEMORY 1 ]  
M2. MEMORY 2 ]  
To  
:Return  
:Return  
ENTER:Next  
Start Copy  
[ Cancel ]  
:Cancel  
:Return  
2
3
Select the setting you want to check.  
• It is useful to do this while a source is playing so you  
can compare the different settings.  
2
3
Select the setting you want to copy.  
• All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected  
MCACC preset memory.  
Select the MCACC preset that you want to check.  
Use / if necessary to switch speakers/settings.  
• LEVEL & DISTANCE – Copies only the channel level  
and speaker distance settings of the selected  
MCACC preset memory.  
4a5.EQ Data Check  
MCACC  
Ch  
M1  
[SBL]  
63Hz  
125Hz  
250Hz  
500Hz  
1kHz  
2kHz  
4kHz  
8kHz  
16kHz  
TRIM  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
dB  
Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the  
settings ‘From’, then specify where you want to copy  
them (‘To’).  
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re  
currently using (this can’t be undone).  
:Return  
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Data Check menu,  
4
Select ‘Copy’ to confirm and copy the settings.  
repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.  
Completed! shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC  
preset has been copied, then you automatically return to  
the Data Management setup menu.  
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.  
Renaming MCACC presets  
Clearing MCACC presets  
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re  
using, you may want to rename them for easier  
identification.  
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets  
stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration  
settings of that preset.  
1
Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data  
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
Management setup menu.  
4.Data Management  
4b.Memory Rename  
4.Data Management  
4d.MCACC Memory Clear  
a . MCACC Data Check  
b . Memory Rename  
c . MCACC Memory Copy  
d . MCACC Memory Clear  
MCACC Position Rename  
a . MCACC Data Check  
b . Memory Rename  
c . MCACC Memory Copy  
d . MCACC Memory Clear  
M1  
M2  
M3  
M4  
M5  
M6  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
1
2
3
4
5
6
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
Clear  
M1. MEMORY  
1
Start Clear  
[ Cancel ]  
:Cancel  
:Return  
:Finish  
:Return  
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then  
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.  
select an appropriate preset name.  
Use / to select the preset, then / to select a  
preset name.  
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re  
currently using (this can’t be undone).  
3
Select ‘Clear’ to confirm and clear the preset.  
3
Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary,  
Completed! shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC  
preset has been cleared, then you automatically return to  
the Data Management setup menu.  
then press RETURN when you’re finished.  
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.  
Note  
1 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38.  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
Manual speaker setup  
07  
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup  
menu.  
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to  
optimize the surround sound performance. You only need  
to make these settings once (unless you change the  
placement of your current speaker system or add new  
speakers).  
5.Manual SP Setup  
5a.Speaker Setting  
Front SMALL  
a . Speaker Setting  
b . Channel Level  
c . Speaker Distance  
d . X-Curve  
Center [ SMALL ]  
Surr  
SB  
[ SMALL ]  
[ SMALLx2  
[ YES  
]
]
SW  
X. OVER  
(THX:ALL SMALL  
[
80Hz]  
)
:Return  
:Return  
These settings are designed to customize your system,  
but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in  
Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto  
MCACC) on page 10, it isn’t necessary to make all of  
these settings.  
2
Choose the set of speakers that you want to set,  
then select a speaker size.  
Use / to select the size (and number) of each of the  
following speakers:  
1
• Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers  
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you  
didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send  
the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.  
Caution  
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at  
high volume.  
• Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker  
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select  
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center  
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to  
the front speakers).  
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press ENTER.  
System Setup MENU  
5.Manual SP Setup  
1 . Auto MCACC  
2 . Surround Back System  
3 . Manual MCACC  
4 . Data Management  
5 . Manual SP Setup  
6 . Input Setup  
a . Speaker Setting  
b . Channel Level  
c . Speaker Distance  
d . X-Curve  
7 . Other Setup  
• Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers  
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select  
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect  
surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the  
surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a  
subwoofer).  
:Exit  
:Return  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to  
adjust these settings in order:  
• Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and number of  
speakers you’ve connected (see below).  
• SB – Select the number of surround back speakers  
you have (one, two or none). Select LARGE if your  
• Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance of your  
speaker system (page 49).  
2
surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies  
effectively. Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to  
the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t  
connect surround back speakers choose NO.  
• Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance of your  
speakers from the listening position (page 50).  
• X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker  
system for movie soundtracks (page 50).  
3
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,  
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.  
Speaker Setting  
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration  
(size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It is  
a good idea to make sure that the settings made in  
Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto  
MCACC) on page 10 are correct. Note that this setting  
applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set  
independently.  
Note  
1 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center and surround speakers can’t be set to LARGE  
if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.  
2 • If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.  
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back terminal.  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
• SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels  
set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when  
YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want  
the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or  
you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that  
would normally come out the front and center  
speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If you did  
not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass  
frequencies are output from other speakers).  
2
3
Select a setup option.  
• MANUAL – Move the test tone manually from  
speaker to speaker and adjust individual channel  
levels.  
• AUTO – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves  
from speaker to speaker automatically.  
1
Confirm your selected setup option.  
The test tones will start after you press ENTER.  
5b.Channel Level  
3
Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.2  
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the  
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).  
Please wait...  
CAUTION  
20  
Loud test tones will  
be output.  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
:Cancel  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
4
Adjust the level of each channel using /.  
Channel Level  
If you selected MANUAL, use / to switch speakers.  
The AUTO setup will output test tones in the order shown  
on-screen:  
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the  
overall balance of your speaker system, an important  
factor when setting up a home theater system.  
5b.Channel Level  
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY  
1
Important  
L
C
R
0.0 dB SR  
0.0 dB ] SBR  
0.0 dB ] SBL  
SL  
[
[
[
[
[
0.0 dB ]  
0.0 dB ]  
0.0 dB ]  
0.0 dB ]  
0.0 dB ]  
[
[
• When Channel Level is selected while MCACC is set  
to OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC memory  
appears. Select a memory to adjust manually.  
SW  
:Finish  
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is  
5b.Channel Level  
3
Select MCACC memory.  
emitted.  
MCACC OFF  
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
M1.MEMORY  
1
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
:Cancel  
ENTER:Next  
Tip  
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup  
menu.  
• You can change the channel levels at any time by  
press RECEIVER, then press CH LEVEL, and then  
using / on the remote control.  
5.Manual SP Setup  
5b.Channel Level  
MCACC  
Test Tone  
:
M1.MEMORY  
AUTO  
1
a . Speaker Setting  
b . Channel Level  
c . Speaker Distance  
d . X-Curve  
+0.5dB  
:Return  
ENTER:Next  
:Cancel  
Note  
1 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not,  
however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due  
low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with  
it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems,  
the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers.  
2 This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back  
from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.  
3 • If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB  
SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).  
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual soundtrack.  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
Speaker Distance  
X-Curve  
For good sound depth and separation from your system,  
you need to specify the distance of your speakers from  
the listening position. The receiver can then add the  
proper delay needed for effective surround sound.  
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright  
when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting  
acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater  
listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie  
soundtracks.  
Important  
1
Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.  
• When Speaker Distance is selected while MCACC is  
set to OFF, the selection screen for the MCACC  
memory appears. Select a memory to adjust  
manually.  
5.Manual SP Setup  
5d.X-Curve  
X-Curve  
-2.0dB/oct  
a . Speaker Setting  
b . Channel Level  
c . Speaker Distance  
d . X-Curve  
5c.Speaker Distance  
:Return  
:Finish  
Select MCACC memory.  
MCACC OFF  
2
Choose the X-Curve setting you want.  
M1.MEMORY  
1
Use / to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed  
as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at  
2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope  
increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the  
following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your  
room size:  
ENTER:Next  
:Cancel  
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP  
Setup menu.  
5.Manual SP Setup  
2
a . Speaker Setting  
b . Channel Level  
c . Speaker Distance  
d . X-Curve  
≤400 ≤550 ≤650 ≤800 ≤2200 ≤12000  
–1 –1.5 –2 –2.5 –3  
Room size (ft )  
X-Curve (dB/oct) –0.5  
:Return  
• If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and  
the X-Curve has no effect.  
2
Adjust the distance of each speaker using /.  
3
Select ‘Return’, then press ENTER to finish.  
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 1 inch  
increments.  
5c.Speaker Distance  
5c.Speaker Distance  
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY  
1
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY  
1
SR  
0 ' 11 ''  
11 ' 09 ''  
12 ' 05 ''  
13 ' 10 ''  
45 ' 00 ''  
L
C
R
10 ' 00 ''  
0 ' 11 ''  
11 ' 09 ''  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
[
[
]
]
SW  
:Finish  
:Finish  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
Tip  
• For best surround sound, make sure the surround  
back speakers are the same distance from the  
listening position.  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
Chapter 8:  
Other connections  
2
Switch the receiver on and press the iPod USB  
input source button on the remote control to switch  
the receiver to the iPod USB  
Caution  
.
• Before making or changing the connections, switch off  
the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
power outlet. Plugging in components should be the  
last connection you make with your system.  
The front panel display shows Loading while the receiver  
verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.  
3
Press TOP MENU to display iPod Top menu.  
• Do not allow any contact between speaker wires from  
different terminals.  
When the display shows Top Menu you’re ready to play  
music from the iPod.  
3
• If after pressing iPod USB the display shows No  
Device, try switching off the receiver and  
reconnecting the iPod to the receiver.  
Connecting an iPod  
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow  
you to control playback of audio content from your iPod  
iPod playback  
1
using the controls of this receiver.  
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage  
4
of the OSD of your TV connected to this receiver. You can  
ON  
DIGITAL VIDEO  
SCALER  
HDMI  
also control all operations for music in the front panel  
display of this receiver.  
CD/CD-R  
FM/AM  
XM/SIRIUS  
iPod USB  
MULTI CH IN  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
Finding what you want to play  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
iPod DIRECT  
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
VIDEO  
L
R
DIGITAL IN  
When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can  
browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist,  
album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to  
using your iPod directly.  
VSX-1018AH  
iPod Top  
[ Playlists  
[ Artists  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
[
Albums  
USB cable  
(for iPod connection)  
[ Songs  
[ Podcasts  
[
Genres  
[ Composers  
[ Audiobooks  
[ Shuffle Songs  
Enter  
iPod  
MENU  
ꢄ
ꢃ
ꢁꢂ  
1
Use / to select a category, then press ENTER to  
browse that category.  
• To return to the previous level any time, press  
RETURN.  
Connecting your iPod to the receiver  
Set this receiver to the standby mode, and then use  
the USB cable (for iPod connection)2 to connect your  
iPod to the iPod DIRECT USB terminal on the front  
panel of this receiver.  
1
2
Use / to browse the selected category (e.g.,  
albums).  
• Use / to move to previous/next levels.  
For the cable connection, refer to also the operating  
instructions for iPod.  
Note  
1 • This system is compatible with the audio of iPod nano, iPod fifth generation, iPod classic, iPod touch (not supported iPod shuffle and iPhone). However,  
that some of the functions may be restricted for some models. Note, however, compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod. Please  
be sure to use the latest available software version.  
• iPod is licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce.  
• Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.  
• Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material  
resulting from the iPod failure.  
2 The USB cable (for iPod connection) is not included with this receiver.  
3 • The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver.  
• You can’t use the iPod USB, XM and SIRIUS radio functions simultaneously with using the MULTI-ZONE feature (page 60).  
4 • Note that non-roman characters in the title are displayed as #.  
• This feature is not available for photos or video clips on your iPod.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you  
Important  
want to play, then press  
to start playback.1  
If an error message lights in the display, try following the  
points below:  
Navigation through categories on your iPod looks like  
this:  
Playlists Songs  
Artists Albums Songs  
Albums Songs  
Symptom What it means  
Error I1  
There is a problem with the signal path from the  
iPod to the receiver. Switch off the receiver and  
reconnect the iPod to the receiver. If this doesn’t  
seem to work, try resetting your iPod.  
Songs  
Podcasts  
Genres Artists Albums Songs  
Composers Albums Songs  
Audiobooks  
Error I2  
The software version being used with the iPod  
needs to be updated. Update the software being  
used with the iPod (please use the latest iPod  
software versions later than the iPod updater  
2004-10-20).  
Shuffle Songs  
Tip  
Error I3  
Error I4  
The iPod that is not supported is connected.  
Check whether the iPod was supported by this  
receiver (page 51).  
• You can play all of the songs in a particular category  
by selecting the All item at the top of each category  
list. For example, you can play all the songs by a  
particular artist.  
When the iPod software version is too old. Update  
the iPod software to the latest version.  
When there is no response from the iPod. Update  
the iPod software to the latest version. If this  
doesn’t seem to work, try resetting your iPod.  
Basic playback controls  
The following table shows the basic playback controls for  
your iPod. Press iPod USB to switch the remote control  
to the iPod USB operation mode.  
No Music There are no playable songs currently stored in the  
Track  
iPod. Input some music files compatible with iPod  
playback.  
Button  
What it does  
Press to start playback.  
No Track  
When there are no tracks in the category selected  
on the iPod. Select a different category.  
If you start playback when something other than a  
song is selected, all the songs that fall into that  
category will play.  
2
Switching the iPod controls  
You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod  
and the receiver.  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when  
paused.  
/  
Press and hold during playback to start scanning.  
1
Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls.3  
/ Press to skip to previous/next track.  
This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this  
receiver’s remote control and OSD become inactive.  
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat One,  
Repeat All and Repeat Off.  
2
Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the receiver  
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle Songs,  
Shuffle Albums and Shuffle Off.  
controls.  
DISPLAY Press repeatedly to change the song playback  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and  
other countries.  
information displayed in the front panel display.  
/  
When browsing, press to move to previous/next  
levels. During playback, press to skip to previous/  
next track.  
/  
During Audiobook playback, press to switch the  
playback speed: Faster Normal Slower  
TOP  
Press to return to the iPod Top menu screen.  
MENU  
RETURN  
Press to return to the previous level.  
Note  
1 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.  
2 You cannot use this function, when an iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.  
3 When this function is set, iPod images cannot be played on this receiver.  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
Basic playback controls  
The following table shows the basic controls on the  
remote for USB playback. Press iPod USB to switch the  
remote control to the iPod USB operation mode.  
Connecting a USB device  
1
It is possible to listen to two-channel audio using the  
USB interface on the front of this receiver. Connect a  
Button  
What it does  
2
USB mass storage device as shown below.  
Starts normal playback.  
Pauses/unpauses playback.  
Press to skip to previous/next track.  
AUTO SURR/  
STREAM DIRECT RETRIEVER  
SOUND  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
STEREO/  
A.L.C.  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
i
Po  
d
DI  
RE  
CT  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
VIDEO  
L
R
DIGITAL IN  
PHONES  
MULTI-ZONE  
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
SPEAKERS  
ST  
–
ST  
+
/  
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat  
Folder, Repeat One and Repeat All.  
USB mass  
storage device  
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle On  
and Shuffle Off.  
DISPLAY  
Press repeatedly to change the song playback  
information displayed in the front panel display.  
Connecting your USB device to the receiver  
/  
During playback, press to skip to previous/next  
track.  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
2
Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the  
TOP MENU Press to skip to first track.  
receiver to the iPod USB  
.
No Device appears in the OSD.  
Important  
3
Connect your USB device.3  
If a USB ERROR message lights in the display, try  
following the points below:  
The USB terminal is located on the front panel.  
Loading appears in the OSD as this receiver starts  
recognizing the USB device connected. After the  
recognition, a playback screen appears in the OSD and  
USB ERROR  
What it means  
USB ERROR1  
The power requirements of the USB device  
are too high for this receiver.  
4
playback starts automatically.  
USB ERROR2  
USB ERROR3  
The USB device is incompatible.  
Folder/File number  
File format  
See Troubleshooting on page 80 for more on  
this error message.  
USB  
FLD004TRK001  
MP3  
Repeat or Shuffle  
DECODE  
There is some problem with the audio data or  
the file’s additional information.  
Song name  
Artist name  
Relax Your Body  
Kevin Jackson  
We are all one  
5
ERROR  
Album name  
Elapsed time  
• Switch the receiver off, then on again.  
ꢀPlay  
0:01  
• Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched  
off.  
• Select another input source (like DVD), then switch  
back to iPod USB.  
• Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the  
device) for USB power.  
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB  
device is incompatible.  
Note  
1 This includes playback of WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC files (except files with copy-protection or restricted playback).  
2 • Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players (MP3 players)  
of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect this receiver to a personal computer for USB playback.  
• Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of  
data that may occur when connected to this receiver.  
• With large amounts of data, it may take longer for the receiver to read the contents of a USB device.  
3 Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.  
4 • If the file selected cannot be played back, this receiver automatically skips to the next file playable.  
• When the file currently being played back has no title assigned to it, the file name is displayed in the OSD instead; when neither the album name nor  
the artist name is present, the row is displayed as a blank space.  
• Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.  
• It is not possible to output the USB audio to ZONE 2.  
5 • If this error occurs, playback is interrupted and the next playable file is played automatically.  
• This error may occur if the title information is changed on a computer, etc.  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers  
to an audio compression technology developed by  
Microsoft Corporation. This receiver plays back WMA  
files encoded using Windows Media Player bearing the  
extension ‘.wma’. Note that DRM-protected files will not  
Compressed audio compatibility  
Note that although most standard bit/sampling rate  
combinations for compressed audio are compatible,  
some irregularly encoded files may not play back. The list  
below shows compatible formats for compressed audio  
files:  
®
play, and files encoded with some versions of Windows  
®
Media Player may not play.  
• MP3 (MPEG-1/2/2.5 Audio Layer 3) – Sampling rates:  
8 kHz to 48 kHz; Bit rates: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (128  
kbps or higher recommended); File extension: .mp3  
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
• WMA (Windows Media Audio) – Sampling rates: 32  
kHz / 44.1 kHz; Bit rates: 32 kbps to 192 kbps (128  
kbps or higher recommended); File extension: .wma;  
WMA9 Pro and WMA lossless encoding: No  
Using XM Radio  
• AAC (MPEG-4 Advanced Audio Coding) – Sampling  
rates: 11.025 kHz to 48 kHz; Bit rates: 16 kbps to 320  
kbps (128 kbps or higher recommended); File  
extension: .m4a; Apple lossless encoding: No  
XM is North America’s number one satellite radio  
company, offering an extraordinary variety of  
commercial-free music, plus the best in premier sports,  
news, talk radio, comedy, children’s and entertainment  
programming, broadcast in superior digital audio quality  
coast to coast. For more information, or to subscribe,  
U.S. customers visit xmradio.com or call XM Listener  
Care at 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346); Canadian  
customers visit xmradio.ca or call XM Listener Care at  
1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677).  
Other compatibility information  
• VBR (variable bit rate) MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC  
1
playback: Yes  
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) protection  
compatible: Yes (DRM-protected audio files will not  
play in this receiver).  
For more details see About XM on page 91.  
About MPEG-4 AAC  
Connecting your XM Radio receiver  
After purchasing an XM Mini-Tuner (sold separately), you  
will also need to activate the XM Radio service to begin  
receiving broadcasts.  
Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is at the core of the  
MPEG-4 AAC standard, which incorporates MPEG-2  
AAC, forming the basis of the MPEG-4 audio  
compression technology. The file format and extension  
used depend on the application used to encode the AAC  
file. This receiver plays back AAC files encoded by  
HDMI  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
2
VIDEO  
IN  
MONITO  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
®
IN  
1
(DVD)  
iTunes bearing the extension ‘.m4a’. DRM-protected  
IN  
2
(CD)  
DVD  
AUDIO  
TV SAT  
IN  
DVR1  
OUT  
DVR2  
OUT IN  
SIRIU  
IN  
BD IN  
files will not play, and files encoded with some versions  
IN  
IN  
XM IN  
CON- IN  
L
OPTICAL  
®
IN  
1
of iTunes may not play.  
IN  
IN  
1
(TV SAT)  
R
IN  
2
IR  
(DVR1)  
ZONE2  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
R
2
A
1
-
2
MULTI CH IN  
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
OUT  
Apple and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in  
the U.S. and other countries.  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
1
-
2
OUT  
L
DIGITAL  
R
SUBWOOFER  
About WMA  
VSX-1018AH  
SATELLiTE  
RADiO  
SATELLiTE RADiO  
XM Mini-Tuner  
1
Connect an XM Mini-Tuner to the XM IN jack on the  
®
rear of this receiver.  
You will also need to activate the XM Radio service.  
The Windows Media logo printed on the box indicates  
that this receiver can playback Windows Media Audio  
content.  
2
Press XM to switch to the XM Radio input.  
For best reception, you may need to move the XM Mini-  
Tuner antenna near a window (the southernmost window  
should produce the best results).  
Note  
1 Note that in some cases playback time will not be displayed correctly.  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
• If after pressing XM the display shows Check XM  
Tuner or Check Antenna, try disconnecting the  
receiver and tuner connections, and then plugging  
•
While listening to XM Radio, press AUTO/DIRECT  
for XM HD Surround listening.  
XM HD Surround can be selected also with the  
STANDARD button.  
1
them back in.  
Saving channel presets  
This receiver can memorize up to 30 channels, stored in  
three banks, or classes, (A, B and C) of 10 channels each.  
Listening to XM Radio  
After connecting, you will be able to use this receiver to  
select channels and navigate categories using the on-  
2
screen display. The information displayed is as follows:  
1
Select the channel you want to memorize.  
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre above.  
Current preset class  
Signal strength  
Category  
Preset number  
XM Satellite Radio  
A
2
Press T.EDIT  
.
The display shows a blinking memory class.  
H i t s  
A1  
XM025  
3
Press CLASS to select one of the three classes, then  
Channel number  
Artist name  
T h e B l e n d  
press / to select the channel preset you want.  
You can also use the number buttons to select a preset.  
Elton John  
Song name  
Channel name  
Candle In the Wind  
• The default for all presets is XM001.  
4
Press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop  
blinking and the receiver stores the XM channel.  
Selecting channels and browsing by genre  
From the XM Channel List, you can browse XM Radio  
channels in the order that they appear, or you can narrow  
3
Tip  
your channel search by genre.  
• You can also press MEM (Memory) during reception  
display to save the information of up to five songs.  
See Using the XM Menu below to recall this  
information.  
XM Satellite Radio  
A
XM Channel List  
UP  
000 RADIO ID  
001 XM Preview  
004 The 40s  
[ 005 The 50s  
006 The 60s  
007 The 70s  
008 The 80s  
DOWN  
H i t s  
A1  
XM025  
T h e B l e n d  
]
Elton John  
Candle In the Wind  
Listening to channel presets  
ENTER  
:
Exit  
You will need to have some presets stored to do this.  
•
Use / to select a channel, then press ENTER to  
1
Press CLASS to select the class in which the channel  
listen to the XM radio broadcast.  
is stored.  
•
To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY, use /  
to select a genre, then press ENTER.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.  
2
Press / to select the channel preset you want.  
• To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.  
You can also use the number buttons on the remote  
control to recall the channel preset.  
Tip  
• You can select channels directly by pressing  
D.ACCESS, then the three-digit channel number.  
Using the XM Menu  
The XM Menu provides additional XM Radio features.  
• You can press DISPLAY to change XM Radio  
information in the front panel display.  
1
Press TOP MENU  
.
2
Use / to select a menu item, then press ENTER  
.
• The currently selected channel is automatically  
chosen (without pressing ENTER) after 5 seconds.  
Choose between the following menu items:  
•
Channel Skip/Add – Use / and ENTER to select  
channels you would like to remove/restore from/to  
the channel list.  
Using XM HD Surround  
XM HD Surround uses Neural Surround™, THX  
®
•
Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of satellite and  
terrestrial reception.  
technologies to achieve optimal surround sound from  
XM radio. XM HD Surround Sound is available on select  
XM channels only.  
Note  
1 You can check the strength of reception in Using the XM Menu above.  
2 It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage of the OSDs. You can, however, use just the front panel display to do everything if you prefer.  
3 Select XM000 (RADIO ID) from the on-screen display to check the Radio ID of the XM Mini-Tuner.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
•
Memory Recall – Use / to browse your saved  
2
Press SIRIUS to switch to the SIRIUS input.  
song information (See Tip above)  
For best reception, you may need to move the  
SiriusConnect™ tuner antenna near a window (refer to  
the manual for the SiriusConnect™ Home tuner for  
antenna placement recommendations).  
3
When you’re finished press TOP MENU to return to  
the reception display.  
• If after pressing SIRIUS the display shows Antenna  
Error, try disconnecting the antenna and  
reconnecting. If the display shows Check Sirius  
Tuner, check the connection of the AC adapter and  
this receiver to the SiriusConnect™ tuner.  
Using SIRIUS Radio  
2
With SIRIUS you get The Best Radio on Radio™ with all  
your favorite entertainment including 100 % commercial-  
free music, plus superior sports coverage, uncensored  
talk and comedy, world-class entertainment, news,  
weather and more for your car, home or office. For more  
information visit sirius.com or siriuscanada.ca  
Listening to SIRIUS Radio  
After connecting, you will be able to use this receiver to  
select channels and navigate categories using the on-  
SIRIUS is available in the US for subscribers with  
addresses in the continental US and is available in  
Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address.  
Required subscription plus compatible SIRIUS tuner and  
antenna are required and sold separately. SIRIUS  
Programming is subject to change. Visit HYPERLINK  
“http://www.sirius.com” sirius.com for the most  
complete and up-to-date channel lineup and product  
information.  
3
screen display. The information displayed is as follows:  
Current preset class  
Signal strength  
SIRIUS  
A
Category  
Preset number  
Decades  
The '50s  
A0  
Channel number  
Artist name  
005  
Chuck Berry  
Johnny B. Good  
Chuck Berry  
Song name  
Composer name  
Channel name  
Connecting your SiriusConnect™ Tuner  
To receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio broadcasts, you will need  
to activate your SiriusConnect™ tuner.  
1
Selecting channels and browsing by genre  
From the SIRIUS Channel Guide, you can browse SIRIUS  
Radio channels in the order that they appear, or you can  
narrow your channel search by genre.  
VSX-1018AH  
HDMI  
OU  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
2
VIDEO  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
IN  
2
(CD)  
DVD  
AUDIO  
TV SAT  
IN  
DVR1  
OUT  
DVR2  
OUT  
SIRIUS ZON  
BD IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OU  
XM IN  
CON- IN  
TROL  
L
OPTICAL  
SIRIUS  
A
SIRIUS Channel List  
IN  
1
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
(TV SAT)  
R
UP  
IN  
2
IR  
(DVR1)  
ZONE2  
000 Sirius ID  
001 Top 40 Hits  
002 Lite Pop  
[ 003 Love Songs  
004 Easy Listening  
005 The '50s  
006 The '60s  
DOWN  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
Decades  
The '50s  
A0  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
R
2
A
1
-
2
MULTI CH IN  
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
OUT  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
005  
Chuck Berry  
1
-
2
OUT  
]
L
DIGITAL  
R
SUBWOOFER  
Johnny B. Good  
Chuck Berry  
ENTER  
:
Exit  
Antenna  
•
Press / to enter the SIRIUS Channel Guide, then  
AC adapter  
navigate through the channels one at time with /  
then press ENTER to listen to the SIRIUS radio  
broadcast.  
,
SIRIUS  
★
• To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY, use /  
to select a genre, then press ENTER.  
SiriusConnect™ HOME tuner  
• To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.  
1
Connect a SiriusConnect™ tuner to the SIRIUS IN  
jack on the rear of this receiver.  
You will also need to connect the antenna and AC  
adapter to the SiriusConnect™ tuner.  
Note  
1 • In order to activate your radio subscription, you will need the SIRIUS ID (SID) which uniquely identifies your tuner. The SID may be found on a sticker  
located on the packaging, or on the bottom of the tuner itself. The label will have a printed 12-digit SID number. When you have located the SID, write it  
down in the space provided near the end of this manual. Connect SIRIUS on the internet at: https://activate.siriusradio.com  
Follow the prompts to activate your subscription, or you can also call SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474).  
• Select 000 (SIRIUS ID) from the on-screen display to check the Radio ID of the SIRIUS Connect tuner (see Selecting channels and browsing by genre  
above).  
2 You can check the strength of reception in Using the SIRIUS Menu on page 57.  
3 It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage of the OSDs. You can, however, use just the front panel display to do everything if you prefer.  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
Using the SIRIUS Menu  
Tip  
The SIRIUS Menu provides additional SIRIUS Radio  
2
• You can select channels directly by pressing  
D.ACCESS, then the three-digit channel number.  
features.  
1
Press TOP MENU  
.
• You can press DISPLAY to change SIRIUS Radio  
information in the front panel display.  
2
Use / to select a menu item, then press ENTER  
.
Choose from the following menu items:  
• The currently selected channel is automatically  
• Channel Skip/Add – Use / and ENTER to select  
channels you would like to remove/restore from/to  
the channel guide.  
chosen (without pressing ENTER) after 5 seconds.  
Saving channel presets  
• Parental Lock – Use / and ENTER to select  
channels you would like to place under parental lock.  
Channels put under parental lock are not displayed in  
the Channel Guide, but may be accessed by directly  
inputting their channel number and providing the  
parental lock password.  
This receiver can memorize up to 30 channels, stored in  
three banks, or classes, (A, B and C) of 10 channels each.  
1
Select the channel you want to memorize.  
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre above.  
2
Press T.EDIT  
.
The display shows a blinking memory class.  
• Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of satellite  
and terrestrial reception.  
3
Press CLASS to select one of the three classes, then  
press / to select the channel preset you want.  
You can also use the number buttons to select a preset.  
•
Memory Recall – Use / to browse your saved  
song information (see Tip above).  
• Password Set – Set the parental lock password.  
4
Press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop  
3
When you’re finished, press TOP MENU to return to  
1
blinking and the receiver stores the SIRIUS channel.  
the reception display.  
Tip  
Connecting the multichannel analog  
inputs  
• You can also press MEM (Memory) during reception  
display to save the information of up to five songs.  
See Using the SIRIUS Menu below to recall this  
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may  
have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending  
on whether your player supports surround back  
2
information.  
2
Listening to channel presets  
channels). Make sure that the player is set to output  
multichannel analog audio.  
You will need to have some presets stored to do this.  
1
Connect the front, surround, center and subwoofer  
1
Press CLASS to select the class in which the channel  
outputs on your DVD player to the corresponding  
MULTI CH IN jack on this receiver.  
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the  
connections.  
is stored.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.  
2
Press / to select the channel preset you want.  
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote  
control to recall the channel preset.  
2
If your DVD player also has outputs for surround  
back channels, connect these to the corresponding  
MULTI CH IN jacks on this receiver.  
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the  
connections.  
• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to  
the SURROUND BACK L (Single) jack on this  
receiver.  
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround  
speakers for the surround channel, not the surround  
back channel.  
Note  
1 You can reset the Channel presets, Memory, Channel Skip/Add, Parental Lock and Password settings in Resetting the system on page 75.  
2 To listen to multichannel analog audio you’ll need to select MULTI CH IN (see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs below for more on this).  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
After selecting Speaker B in Surround back speaker  
setting on page 41, you can use the speakers connected  
to the (surround back) B speaker terminals on the rear  
panel to listen to stereo playback in another room. See  
Switching the speaker system below for the listening  
options with this setup.  
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs  
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as  
above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs  
1
for surround sound playback.  
SIRIUS  
iPod USB  
MULTI CH IN  
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back  
speaker terminals on the rear panel.  
Connect them the same way you connected your  
speakers in Installing your speaker system on page 21.  
Make sure to review Placing the speakers on page 22  
when placing the speakers in another room.  
AUDIO/VIDEO HANNEL RECEIVER VSX-1018AH  
iPod DIRECT  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
GITAL IN  
USB  
ADVANCED  
MCACC  
DIGITAL PRECISION  
PROCESSING  
DIGITAL VIDEO  
SCALER  
HDMI  
2
Select ‘Speaker B’ from the Surround Back System  
SAT  
DVR 1/DVR  
2
VIDEO  
HDMI 1/HDMI  
2
CD/CD-R  
FM/AM  
XM/SIRIUS  
iPod USB  
MULTI CH IN  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
menu.  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
STEREO/  
A.L.C.  
See Surround back speaker setting on page 41 to do this.  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
iPod DIRECT  
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
VIDEO  
L
R
DIGITAL IN  
SPEAKERS  
ST  
–
ST  
+
Switching the speaker system  
If you selected Speaker B in Surround back speaker  
setting on page 41, three speaker system settings are  
possible using the SPEAKERS button. If you selected  
Normal or Front Bi-Amp, the button will simply switch  
your main speaker system on or off. The options below  
1
Make sure you have set the playback source to the  
proper output setting.  
For example, you might need to set your DVD player to  
output multichannel analog audio.  
2
are for the Speaker B setting only.  
2
Press MULTI CH IN on the front panel to turn the  
multi-channel input on.  
•
Use the SPEAKERS button on the front panel to  
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the  
analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be  
too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer  
can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup in  
Other Setup. For details, see Multi Channel Input  
Setup on page 69.  
select a speaker system setting.  
As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal, the  
button will simply switch your main speaker system (A)  
on or off.  
AUTO SURR/  
STREAM DIRECT RETRIEVER  
SOUND  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
STEREO/  
A.L.C.  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
iPod DIRECT  
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
VIDEO  
L
R
DIGITAL IN  
PHONES  
MULTI-ZONE  
–
+
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
S
P
E
A
K
E
R
S
ST  
ST  
Speaker B setup  
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system option:  
Caution  
• SPA – Sound is output from speaker system A and  
the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.  
• Before making or changing the connections, switch off  
the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
power outlet. Plugging in components should be the  
last connection you make with your system.  
• SPB – Sound is output from the two speakers  
connected to speaker system B. Multichannel  
sources will not be heard. The same signal is output  
from the surround back channel pre-out terminals.  
• Be careful not to allow any contact between speaker  
wires from different terminals.  
• SPAB – Sound is output from speaker system A (up  
to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two  
speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer.  
The sound from speaker system B will be the same as  
the sound from speaker system A (multichannel  
sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).  
• You can use speakers with a nominal impedance  
between 6 Ω to 16 Ω (please see Switching the  
speaker impedance on page 74 if you plan to use  
speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).  
Note  
1 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.  
• You can’t listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs.  
2 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 48. However, if SPB is selected above, no sound is heard  
from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).  
• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 41 output from the surround back pre-out terminals may change.  
• All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
• SP(off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The  
same sound is output from the pre-out terminals  
(including from your subwoofer, if connected) as  
when selecting speaker system A (above).  
Bi-wiring your speakers  
The reasons for bi-wiring are basically the same as bi-  
amping, but additionally, interference effects within the  
wire could be reduced, producing better sound. Again, to  
do this your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they  
must have separate terminals for the high and low  
frequencies). When bi-wiring, make sure you’ve selected  
Normal or Speaker B in Surround back speaker setting on  
page 41.  
Bi-amping your front speakers  
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver  
and low frequency driver of your speakers to different  
amplifier (in this case, to both front and surround back  
terminals) for better crossover performance. Your  
speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate  
terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement  
will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.  
•
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to  
the speaker terminal on the receiver.  
Using a banana plug for the second connection is  
recommended.  
1
Connect your speakers as shown below.  
This illustration below shows the connections for bi-  
amping your front left speaker. Hook up your front right  
speaker in the same way.  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
SURROUND BACK  
/
B
R
L
R
L
R
L
A
(Single)  
Front left  
speaker  
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL  
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI  
High  
Caution  
• Make sure you use a parallel (not series, which are  
fairly uncommon) connection when bi-wiring your  
speakers.  
Low  
Since both front and surround back speaker terminals  
output the same audio, it doesn’t matter which set (front  
or surround back) is powering which part (High or Low)  
of the speaker.  
• Don’t connect different speakers from the same  
terminal in this way.  
• Make sure that the + / – connections are properly  
inserted.  
2
Select the ‘Front Bi-Amp’ setting from the  
Surround Back System menu.  
See Surround back speaker setting on page 41 to specify  
how you’re using the surround back speaker terminals.  
Caution  
• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals  
have two metal plates that connect the High to the  
Low terminals. These must be removed when you are  
bi-amping the speakers or you could severely  
damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for  
more information.  
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network,  
make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing  
so may damage your speakers.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
Connecting additional amplifiers  
MULTI-ZONE listening  
This receiver has more than enough power for any home  
use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every  
channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the  
connections shown below to add amplifiers to power  
your speakers.  
This receiver can power up to two independent systems  
in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI-  
ZONE connections. An example MULTI-ZONE setup is  
shown below.  
Sub zone  
Main zone  
• Before making or changing the connections, switch  
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
AC outlet.  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN  
OUT  
1
2
IN  
3
MONITOR  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
L
R
MONITOR  
OUT  
ANTENNA  
IN  
3
Front channel  
amplifier  
DVR2  
OUT  
SIRIUS ZONE 2  
Y
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OOUUTT  
OUT  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
PB  
FM UNBAL 75  
AM LOOP  
Center channel  
amplifier (mono)  
ASSIGNABLE  
P
R
CD  
CD-R  
1
-
3
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURR  
R
L
R
A
) PRE OUT  
((ingle)  
IN  
F
F
R
R
O
O
N
N
T
T
C
E
N
T
E
R
ANALOG  
INPUT  
ACK  
L
R
Surround channel  
amplifier  
-R  
S
U
B
W
O
OFER  
S
U
R
R
O
U
N
D
S
U
R
R
O
U
N
ANALOG  
INPUT  
SURROUND  
L
R
AUDIO IN  
L
R
Surround back  
channel amplifier  
VSX-1018AH  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
Powered  
subwoofer  
Different sources can be playing in two zones at the same  
time or, depending on your needs, the same source can  
also be used. The main and sub zones have independent  
power (the main zone power can be off while the sub zone  
is on) and the sub zone can be controlled by the remote  
or front panel controls. However, you may need to specify  
the volume settings in ZONE Audio Setup on page 69.  
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL  
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI  
VSX-1018AH  
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround  
back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In  
this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single))  
terminal only.  
• The sound from the surround back terminals will  
depend on how you have configured the Surround  
back speaker setting on page 41.  
Making MULTI-ZONE connections  
It is possible to make these connections if you have a  
1
separate TV and speakers for your sub zone (ZONE 2).  
• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the  
speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any  
speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.  
You will also need a separate amplifier if you are not  
using the Surround Back System setup (page 61) for your  
sub zone.  
• If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front  
speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 48) to  
LARGE.  
Note  
1 You can’t use sound controls (such as the bass/treble controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub zone.  
You can, however, use the features available with your sub zone amplifier.  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
•
Connect a TV monitor to the ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT  
MULTI-ZONE listening options  
The following table shows what you can listen to in the  
sub zone:  
jacks on the rear of this receiver.  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the  
surround back speaker terminals as shown below.  
Sub Zone  
ZONE2  
Input sources available  
Sub zone  
Main zone  
iPod, XM or SIRIUS Radio, the built-in tuner  
VSX-1018AH  
a
and other analog audio sources. With video  
sources, only composite video is possible.  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR  
OUT  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
Y
a.• With the MULTI CH IN input, sound is output only from the front L/R  
channels.  
• The USB audio cannot be output to ZONE 2.  
OR  
P
B
FM UNBAL 75  
ASSIGNABLE  
AM LOOP  
PR  
S
ZZOONNEE 2  
OUT  
1
-
3
(Single) PRE OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
FRONT  
CENTER  
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2  
)
•
Connect a separate amplifier to the ZONE 2 AUDIO  
SUBWOOFER  
CD  
CD-R  
SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT  
jacks, both on the rear of this receiver.  
T
CENTER  
SURROUND  
S
U
R
R
O
U
N
D
B
A
C
K
//  
B
L
R
L
R
L
(Single)  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub  
zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.  
SELECTABLE SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL  
SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI  
Sub zone  
Main zone  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN  
OUT  
1
2
IN  
3
MONITOR  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls  
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust  
the sub zone volume and select sources. See MULTI-  
ZONE remote controls on page 62.  
DVR2  
OUT  
SIRIUS ZONE 2  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OOUUTT  
OUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER VSX-1018AH  
CD  
CD-R  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURR  
R
L
R
A
STANDBY/ON  
ACK  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
ADVANCED  
MCACC  
DIGITAL PRECISION  
PROCESSING  
DIGITAL VIDEO  
SCALER  
HDMI  
DVD  
BD  
TV SAT  
DVR 1/DVR  
2
VIDEO  
HDMI 1/HDMI  
2
CD/CD-R  
FM/AM  
XM/SIRIUS  
iPod USB  
MULTI CH IN  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
AUTO SURR/  
SOUND  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
STEREO/  
A.L.C.  
STREAM DIRECT RETRIEVER  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
iPod DIRECT  
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
VIDEO  
L
R
DIGITAL IN  
AUDIO IN  
PHONES  
MULTI-ZONE  
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
SPEAKERS  
ST  
–
ST  
+
VSX-1018AH  
AUTO SURR/  
STREAM DIRECT RETRIEVER  
SOUND  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
STEREO/  
A.L.C.  
PHONES  
MULTI-ZONE  
Surround Back System MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE  
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
SPEAKERS  
ST  
–
ST  
+
2)  
You must select ZONE 2 in Surround back speaker setting  
on page 41 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the  
sub zone will be temporarily interrupted when controlling  
the main zone (for example, changing the input source or  
starting playback).  
1
Press the MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF button on the front  
panel.  
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:  
• ZONE 2 ON – Switches the MULTI-ZONE feature on  
• ZONE 2 OFF – Switches the MULTI-ZONE feature off  
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE  
control has been switched ON.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
2
3
Press CONTROL.  
1
• When the receiver is on, make sure that any  
operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE 2  
shows in the display. If this is not showing, the front  
panel controls affect the main zone only.  
Connecting an IR receiver  
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or  
shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote  
control in another zone, you can use an optional IR  
receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your  
system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of  
Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source  
for the zone you have selected.  
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected  
to the CD-R inputs to the sub room (ZONE 2).  
5
this receiver.  
1
Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR ZONE2 IN  
• If you select FM/AM, you can use the tuner controls  
to select a preset station (see Saving station presets  
on page 36 if you’re unsure how to do this).  
jack on the rear of this receiver.  
2
Closet or shelving unit  
Non-Pioneer  
component  
• You can’t use the iPod USB, XM and SIRIUS Radio  
functions simultaneously with using the MULTI-  
ZONE feature.  
IR  
IN  
Pioneer  
4
Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the  
CONTROL  
component  
volume.  
IN  
OUT  
This is only possible if you selected the VARIABLE  
volume control in ZONE Audio Setup on page 69.  
3
HDMI  
OUT  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
2
VIDEO  
IN  
IN  
O
IN  
1
D)  
DVD  
AUDIO  
(DVD)  
5
When you’re finished, press CONTROL again to  
IN  
2
(CD)  
IN  
DVD  
TV SAT  
IN  
N
BD IN  
CON- IN  
AUDIO  
IN  
return to the main zone controls.  
You can also press the MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF button on  
XM IN  
TROL  
CO  
C
O
N
N
-
-
IN  
L
CAL  
1
AT)  
R
TROL  
TROL  
L
OPTICAL  
1
(TV SAT)  
IN  
OU  
OU  
T
T
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IR  
IR  
(DVR1)  
R
ZONE2  
ZONE2  
I
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
2
R1)  
2
4
MULTI
1
-
2
IR  
CENTER SU
ZONE2  
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
the front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone.  
OUT  
OUT  
FRONT  
1
-
2
OUT  
IN  
L3  
R2)  
R
DIGITAL  
OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
FRONT  
UT  
MULTI-ZONE remote controls  
L
SIGNABLE  
Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2 to  
operate the corresponding zone.  
IR receiver  
2
Connect the IR ZONE2 IN jack of another  
The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE  
remote controls:  
component to the IR ZONE2 OUT jack on the rear of  
this receiver to link it to the IR receiver.  
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for  
the type of cable necessary for the connection.  
Button  
What it does  
Switches on/off power in the sub zone.  
Use to select the input source in the sub zone.  
INPUT  
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR  
receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components  
with this receiver’s sensor on page 79 to connect to  
the CONTROL jacks instead of the IR ZONE2 OUT  
jack.  
SELECT  
Input  
source  
buttons  
Use to select the input source directly (this may  
not work for some functions) in the sub zone.  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
+/–  
Use to set the listening volume in the sub zone.  
Note  
1 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE 2 continues to show in the display.  
2 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone.  
Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.  
3 The volume levels of the main and sub zones are independent.  
4 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.  
• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.  
5 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.  
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.  
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
•
Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the  
CONTROL IN jack of this receiver with the CONTROL  
OUT jack of your flat panel TV.  
Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat  
panel TV  
If you have a Pioneer flat panel TV, you can use an SR+  
1
cable to connect it to this receiver and take advantage of  
various convenient features, such as automatic video  
input switching of the flat panel TV when the input is  
changed.  
VIDEO  
INPUT 1  
VIDEO  
INPUT 2  
2
Pioneer flat panel TV  
Pioneer flat panel TV  
CONTROL  
OUT  
Satellite receiver, etc.  
DVD player  
DVD  
AUDIO IN  
TV SAT  
AUDIO IN  
VSX-1018AH  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER VSX-1018AH  
STANDBY/ON  
HDMI  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
ADVANCED  
MCACC  
DIGITAL PRECISION  
PROCESSING  
DIGITAL VIDEO  
SCALER  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
HDMI  
1
-
2
VIDEO  
IN  
M
DVD  
BD  
T
V
S
A
T
DVR 1/DVR  
2
VIDEO  
HDMI 1/HDMI  
2
CD/CD-R  
FM/AM  
XM/SIRIUS  
i
P
o
d
U
S
B
MULTI CH IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
OUT  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
AUTO SURR/  
STREAM DIRECT RETRIEVER  
SOUND  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
STEREO/  
A.L.C.  
VIDEO INPUT  
AUDIO  
iPod DIRECT  
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
VIDEO  
L
R
DIGITAL IN  
IN  
2
PHONES  
MULTI-ZONE  
CONTROL  
ON/OFF  
SPEAKERS  
ST  
–
ST  
+
(CD)  
DVD  
AUDIO  
TV SAT  
DVR1  
OUT  
DVR2  
OUT IN  
BD IN  
I
IN  
XM IN  
CON- IN  
TROL  
L
OPTICAL  
IN  
1
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
(TV SAT)  
VSX-1018AH  
R
IN  
2
IR  
ZONE2  
(DVR1)  
SPEAKERS  
IN  
R
ASSIGNABLE  
1
2
To make the most of the SR+ features, you should  
connect your source components (DVD player, etc.) in a  
slightly different way to that described in this chapter. For  
each component, connect the video output directly to the  
flat panel TV, and just connect the audio (analog and/or  
digital) to this receiver.  
A
MULTI CH IN  
-
2
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
OUT  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
1
-
2
OUT  
L
DIGITAL  
R
SUBWOOFER  
Important  
• You can’t use the SR+ features when HDMI Control  
is set to ON. Make sure to set HDMI Control to OFF  
when you use the SR+ features (page 65).  
• If you connect to a Pioneer flat panel TV using an  
SR+ cable, you will need to point the remote control  
at the flat panel TV remote sensor to control the  
receiver. In this case, you won’t be able to control the  
receiver using the remote control if you switch the flat  
panel TV off.  
• Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need  
to make a few settings in the receiver. See The Input  
Setup menu on page 67 and SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat  
panel TVs on page 70 for detailed instructions.  
Note  
1 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for  
more information on obtaining an SR+ cable (you can also use a commercially available 3-ringed mini phone plug for the connection).  
2 This receiver is compatible with all SR+ equipped Pioneer flat panel TVs from 2003 onward.  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer flat  
panel TV  
When connected using an SR+ cable, a number of  
features become available to make using this receiver  
with your Pioneer flat panel TV even easier. These  
features include:  
• On-screen displays when making receiver settings,  
such as speaker setup, MCACC setup, and so on.  
• On-screen volume display.  
• On-screen display of listening mode.  
• Automatic video input switching on the flat panel TV.  
• Automatic volume muting on the flat panel TV.  
See also SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat panel TVs on page 70  
for more on setting up the receiver.  
Important  
• The SR+ features do not work when any of the iPod  
USB, XM or SIRIUS Radio function is selected.  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
1
GENRE  
4
2
MCACC  
5
3
SLEEP  
MEM  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
6
A.ATT  
SR+  
SBch  
RECEIVER  
7
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ENTER  
0
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MAIN  
ZONE  
2
INPUT  
1
Make sure that the flat panel TV and this receiver  
are switched on and that they are connected with the  
SR+ cable.  
See Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat panel TV on  
page 63 for more on connecting these components.  
• Make sure you have also selected the display input to  
which you’ve connected the receiver in The Input  
Setup menu on page 67.  
2
To switch SR+ mode on/off, press RECEIVER, then  
press the SR+ button.  
The front panel display shows SR+ ON or SR+ OFF.  
• The automatic video input switching and the  
automatic volume muting features are enabled  
separately; see SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat panel TVs on  
page 70.  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HDMI Control  
09  
Chapter 9:  
HDMI Control  
• To get the most out of this function, we recommend  
that you connect your HDMI component not to a flat  
panel TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on  
this receiver.  
Important  
• The KURO LINK function name used on the web and  
in catalogues is referred to as HDMI Control in the  
operating instructions and on the product.  
HDMI-compatible monitor or  
flat panel TV  
By connecting this receiver to an HDMI Control-  
compatible Pioneer flat panel TV or the HDD/DVD  
recorder with an HDMI cable, you can control this  
receiver from the remote control of a connected flat panel  
TV, as well as have the connected flat panel TV  
automatically change inputs in response to operations  
carried out on this receiver.  
Refer to the operating manual for your flat panel TV for  
more information about which operations can be carried  
out by connecting via HDMI cable.  
AV OUT  
AUDIO  
DIGITAL OUT  
R
L
HDMI IN  
• You cannot use this function with components that  
do not support HDMI Control.  
HDMI  
OUT  
• We cannot guarantee this receiver will work with  
HDMI Control-compatible components other than  
those made by Pioneer.  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
2
VIDEO  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
IN  
2
(CD)  
DVD  
AUDIO  
TV SAT  
IN  
DVR1  
OUT  
DVR  
OUT  
BD IN  
IN  
IN  
XM IN  
CON
T
L
OPTICAL  
IN  
1
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
(TV SAT)  
R
Making the HDMI Control connections  
IN  
2
IR  
ZONE2  
(DVR1)  
SPEA  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
2
A
-
2
You can use synchronized operation for a connected flat  
panel TV and up to three other components.  
MULTI CH IN  
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
OUT  
FRONT  
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
1
-
2
OUT  
L
Be sure to connect the flat panel TV’s audio cable to the  
audio input of this receiver.  
DIGITAL  
R
SUBWOOFER  
VSX-1018AH  
HDMI-equipped component  
Important  
• When connecting this system or changing  
connections, be sure to switch the power off and  
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.  
After completing all connections, connect the power  
cords to the wall socket.  
HDMI OUT  
Setting the HDMI options  
• After connecting this receiver to an AC outlet, a 15  
second initialization process begins. You cannot  
carry out any operations during initialization. The  
HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during  
initialization, and you can turn this receiver on once  
it has stopped blinking.  
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as  
HDMI Control-compatible connected components in  
order to make use of the HDMI Control function. For  
more information see the operating instructions for each  
component.  
Setting the HDMI Control mode  
Choose whether to set this receiver’s HDMI Control  
function ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use  
the HDMI Control function.  
• When using a TV not manufactured by Pioneer, put  
this setting to OFF.  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HDMI Control  
09  
1
2
3
Press RECEIVER, then press the SETUP button.  
Synchronized amp mode  
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER  
.
Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an  
operation for the flat panel TV. For more information, see  
the operating manual of your flat panel TV.  
Select ‘HDMI Control Setup’ from the Other Setup  
menu.  
7.Other Setup  
7d.HDMI Control Setup  
Synchronized amp mode operations  
By connecting a component to this receiver with an  
HDMI cable you can use synchronized amp mode, which  
a . Multi Channel In Setup  
b . ZONE Audio Setup  
c . SR+ Setup  
d . HDMI Control Setup  
e . OSD Adjustment  
HDMI Control  
OFF  
2
allows you to synchronize the following operations :  
:Return  
:Finish  
• Displays on the flat panel TV when you mute or adjust  
the volume of this receiver.  
4
Select the ‘HDMI Control’ setting you want.  
• ON – Enables the HDMI Control function. When this  
receiver’s power is turned off and you have a  
• The input of this receiver is automatically changed  
when playback occurs on a connected component.  
supported source begin playback while using the  
HDMI Control function, the audio and video output  
from the HDMI connection are output from the flat  
• Even if you change this receiver’s input to a device  
that is not connected by HDMI, the synchronized  
amp mode remains in effect.  
1
panel TV.  
• This receiver’s input switches automatically when the  
channel is switched on an HDMI control-compatible  
flat panel TV.  
• OFF – The HDMI Control is disabled. Synchronized  
operations cannot be used. When this receiver’s  
power is turned off, audio and video of sources  
connected via HDMI are not output.  
• By pressing GENRE when listening to a source from  
a HDD/DVD recorder, the most appropriate listening  
mode is automatically selected (see Using the genre  
synchronizing function on page 35 for more on this).  
5
When you’re finished, press SETUP.  
You will finish to System Setup menu.  
Canceling synchronized amp mode  
Operate the flat panel TV to cancel the synchronized amp  
mode.  
Before using synchronization  
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you  
must:  
If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected  
via HDMI to a flat panel TV or while you are watching a TV  
programme, the power for this receiver is turned off.  
1
Put all components into standby mode.  
2
Turn the power on for all components, with the  
power for the flat panel TV being turned on last.  
3
Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is  
About HDMI Control  
connected to this receiver, and see if video output from  
connected components displays properly on the screen  
or not.  
• Connect the flat panel TV directly to this receiver.  
Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or  
an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause  
operational errors.  
4
Check whether the components connected to all  
HDMI inputs are properly displayed.  
• Only connect components you intend to use as a  
source to the HDMI input of this receiver.  
Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or  
an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause  
operational errors.  
Note  
1 • When HDMI Control is set to ON, the audio/video signals input at the HDMI IN terminals are output at the HDMI OUT terminal even when this receiver  
is switched off.  
• With HDMI Control set to ON, Input Setup and HDMI Input are automatically set to OFF.  
2 The linked mode remains in effect even when this receiver’s input is switched to something other than HDMI.  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Settings  
10  
Chapter 10:  
Other Settings  
5
Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your  
component.  
The Input Setup menu  
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical  
output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s  
Digital In setting from COAX-1 (default) to the optical  
input you’ve connected it to. The numbering (OPT-1 and  
2) corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on  
the back of the receiver.  
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu  
if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to  
the default settings (see Input function default and  
possible settings on page 68). In this case, you need to  
tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which  
terminal so the buttons on the remote correspond to the  
components you’ve connected.  
• If you change the setting to an input that has been  
previously assigned to another function (for example,  
TV SAT), the setting for that function will  
automatically be switched off.  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
EXIT  
TUNE TOOLS  
MEM  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
CH  
TOP MENU  
ST  
MENU  
T.EDIT  
TV CTRL  
RECEIVER  
DVD  
DVR 1  
FM/AM  
BD  
DVR 2  
XM  
TV  
CD  
HDMI  
CD-R  
ENTER  
ST  
• If your component is connected via a component  
video cable to an input terminal other than the  
default, you must tell the receiver which input  
terminal your component is connected to, or else you  
may see the composite video signals instead of the  
CATEGORY  
RETURN  
MAIN  
ZONE  
2
SETUP TUNE  
SIRIUS iPod USB  
iPod CTRL  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
1
Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.  
component video signals.  
2
Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press  
6
When you’re finished, select ‘Next’ to continue to  
SETUP  
.
the next screen.  
The second screen of the Input Setup has three optional  
settings:  
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /  
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens  
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and  
exit the current menu.  
• Input Name – You can choose to rename the input  
function for easier identification. Select Rename to  
do so, or Default to return to the system default.  
3
Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.  
• PDP In (SR+) – To control certain functions on this  
System Setup MENU  
6.Input Setup  
(1/2)  
receiver from a flat panel TV, select the display input  
1 . Auto MCACC  
Input  
DVD  
2 . Surround Back System  
3 . Manual MCACC  
4 . Data Management  
5 . Manual SP Setup  
6 . Input Setup  
Digital In  
HDMI Input  
Component In  
[
[
[
COAX-1  
Input-1  
Comp-3  
]
]
]
2
to which you’ve connected the receiver.  
7 . Other Setup  
7
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
(
NEXT  
)
You will return to the System Setup menu.  
:Exit  
:Finish  
4
Select the input function that you want to set up.  
The default names correspond with the names next to the  
terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or VIDEO)  
which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote  
control.  
6.Input Setup  
(1/2)  
6.Input Setup  
(1/2)  
Input  
DVD  
(
Back  
DVD  
)
Digital In  
HDMI Input  
Component In  
[
[
[
COAX-1  
Input-1  
Comp-3  
]
]
]
Input Name  
PDP In (SR+)  
Rename  
OFF  
[
]
(
NEXT  
)
:Finish  
ENTER:Next  
:Finish  
Note  
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the Video options on page 72),  
you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.  
2 You will have to make an SR+ cable connection from a CONTROL OUT jack on the display to the CONTROL IN jack on this receiver (opposite from the  
setup in Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat panel TV on page 63). Note that to control this receiver using the remote, you will have to point it at the flat  
panel TV’s remote sensor after making this connection.  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Settings  
10  
Input function default and possible settings  
The terminals on the rear of the receiver generally  
correspond to the name of one of the input source  
functions. If you have connected components to this  
receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults  
below, see The Input Setup menu on page 67 to tell the  
receiver how you’ve connected up. The dots () indicate  
possible assignments.  
The Other Setup menu  
The Other Setup menu is where you can make  
customized settings to reflect how you are using the  
receiver.  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
EXIT  
TUNE TOOLS  
MEM  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
CH  
TOP MENU  
ST  
MENU  
T.EDIT  
TV CTRL  
RECEIVER  
DVD  
DVR 1  
FM/AM  
BD  
DVR 2  
XM  
TV  
CD  
HDMI  
CD-R  
ENTER  
ST  
Input Terminals  
Input source  
CATEGORY  
RETURN  
Digital  
HDMI  
Component  
MAIN  
ZONE  
2
SETUP TUNE  
SIRIUS iPod USB  
iPod CTRL  
a
DVD  
COAX 1  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
BD  
(BD)  
Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.  
a
TV SAT  
OPT 1  
OPT 2  
2
Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press  
a
DVR1  
DVR2  
VIDEO  
the SETUP  
.
a
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use /  
// and ENTER to navigate through the screens  
and select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm and  
exit the current menu.  
a
(Fixed)  
HDMI 1  
HDMI 2  
iPod USB  
XM  
(HDMI-1)  
(HDMI-2)  
3
Select ‘Other Setup’ then press ENTER.  
System Setup MENU  
7.Other Setup  
1 . Auto MCACC  
2 . Surround Back System  
3 . Manual MCACC  
4 . Data Management  
5 . Manual SP Setup  
6 . Input Setup  
a . Multi Ch In Setup  
b . ZONE Audio Setup  
c . SR+ Setup  
d . HDMI Control Setup  
e . OSD Adjustment  
SIRIUS  
CD  
COAX 2  
7 . Other Setup  
:Exit  
:Return  
CD-R  
FM/AM  
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
a.With HDMI Control set to ON, assignments cannot be made (see HDMI  
Control on page 65).  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to  
adjust these settings in order:  
• Multi Ch In Setup – Specifies the optional settings  
for a multi-channel input.  
• ZONE Audio Setup – Specifies your volume setting  
for a MULTI-ZONE setup (see ZONE Audio Setup on  
page 69).  
• SR+ Setup – Specifies how you want to control your  
Pioneer flat panel TV (see SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat  
panel TVs on page 70).  
• HDMI Control Setup – Synchronizes this receiver  
with your Pioneer component supporting HDMI  
Control (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on  
page 65).  
• OSD Adjustment – Adjusts the position of the on-  
screen display on your TV (see OSD Adjustment on  
page 70).  
5
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,  
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Settings  
10  
Multi Channel Input Setup  
You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multi-  
channel input.  
ZONE Audio Setup  
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI-  
ZONE listening on page 60) you may need to specify your  
volume setting.  
1
Select ‘Multi Ch In Setup’ from the Other Setup  
menu.  
1
Select ‘ZONE Audio Setup’ from the Other Setup  
menu.  
7.Other Setup  
7.Other Setup  
7b.ZONE Audio Setup  
ZONE Volume Level  
a . Multi Ch In Setup  
b . ZONE Audio Setup  
c . SR+ Setup  
d . HDMI Control Setup  
e . OSD Adjustment  
2
a . Multi Ch In Setup  
b . ZONE Audio Setup  
c . SR+ Setup  
Variable  
d . HDMI Control Setup  
e . OSD Adjustment  
Be careful of loud  
volume when "Fixed"  
is selected.  
:Return  
:Return  
:Finish  
2
Select the ‘SW Input Gain’ setting you want.  
• 0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level  
originally recorded on the source.  
2
Select the volume level setting.1  
• Variable – Use this setting if you’ve connected a  
power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is  
simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be  
using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.  
• +10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level  
increased by 10 dB.  
7a.Multi Ch In Setup  
• Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully  
integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX  
receiver) in the sub room and want to use that  
receiver’s volume controls. (This setting is not  
available if the surround back system setting is set to  
ZONE 2.)  
SW Input Gain  
Video Input  
0dB  
BD  
[
]
:Finish  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from this  
receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is  
quite low in the sub zone at first, and then experiment to  
find the correct level.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
Note  
1 If you selected ZONE 2 in the Surround back speaker setting on page 41, you won’t be able to change the volume level.  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Settings  
10  
SR+ Setup for Pioneer flat panel TVs  
OSD Adjustment  
Use this feature to adjust your TV display if it seems  
difficult to see all the instructions on the screen.  
Make the following settings if you have connected a  
Pioneer flat panel TV to this receiver using an SR+ cable.  
Note that the number of function settings available will  
depend on the flat panel TV you’ve connected.  
1
Select ‘OSD Adjustment’ from the Other Setup  
menu.  
See also Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat panel TV on  
page 63 and Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer flat panel  
TV on page 64.  
A
A
7.Other Setup  
a . Multi Ch In Setup  
b . ZONE Audio Setup  
c . SR+ Setup  
d . HDMI Control Setup  
e . OSD Adjustment  
X=  
0
,
Y=  
0
[
Finish  
]
1
Select ‘SR+ Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.  
:Finish  
7.Other Setup  
7c.SR+ Setup  
A
A
:Return  
a . Multi Ch In Setup  
b . ZONE Audio Setup  
c . SR+ Setup  
d . HDMI Control Setup  
e . OSD Adjustment  
PDP Volume Control  
OFF  
2
Use /// to move the display field around  
Monitor Out Connect  
OFF  
[
]
until you get one that you feel best suits your TV.  
:Return  
:Finish  
3
When you’re finished, press ENTER  
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
2
3
Select the ‘PDP Volume Control’ setting you want.  
• OFF – The receiver does not control the volume of the  
flat panel TV.  
• ON – When the receiver is switched to one of the  
inputs that use the flat panel TV (DVD, for example),  
the volume on the flat panel TV is muted so only  
sound from the receiver is heard.  
Assign any input source connected to the flat panel  
TV to the corresponding input number.  
This matches the receiver’s input source with a  
numbered video input on the flat panel TV. For example,  
assign DVD to input-2 if you have connected the your  
DVD video output to video input 2 on the flat panel TV.  
• The Monitor Out Connect should be set to the input  
that you’ve used to connect this receiver to your flat  
panel TV.  
7c.SR+ Setup  
PDP Volume Control  
[
OFF  
]
Monitor Out Connect  
OFF  
:Finish  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
11  
Chapter 11:  
Using other functions  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
Setting the Audio options  
MIDNIGHT Allows you to hear effective  
surround sound of movies at low  
volumes.  
MID/LDN OFF  
There are a number of additional sound settings you can  
make using the Audio Parameter menu. The defaults, if  
not stated, are listed in bold.  
MIDNIGHT ON  
LOUDNESS ON  
LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble  
from music sources at low  
volumes.  
Important  
BASS  
Adjusts the amount of bass.  
–6 to +6 (dB)  
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the Audio  
Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current  
source, settings and status of the receiver.  
Default: 0 (dB)  
TREBLE  
Adjusts the amount of treble.  
–6 to +6 (dB)  
Default: 0 (dB)  
1
2
Press RECEIVER, then press AUDIO PARAMETER  
.
S.RTRV  
(Sound  
When audio data is removed  
during the WMA/MP3/MPEG-4  
OFF  
Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.  
ON  
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,  
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the  
table below for notes on this.  
Retriever) AACcompressionprocess, sound  
quality often suffers from an  
uneven sound image. The Sound  
Retriever feature employs new  
DSP technology that helps bring  
CD quality sound back to  
compressed 2-channel audio by  
restoring sound pressure and  
smoothing jagged artifacts left  
over after compression.  
3
Use / to set it as necessary.  
See the table below for the options available for each  
setting.  
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
DNR  
(Digital  
Noise  
May improve the quality of sound  
in a noisy source (for example,  
cassette or video tape with lots of  
OFF  
MCACC  
(MCACC  
preset)  
Selects your favorite MCACC  
preset memory when multiple  
preset memories are saved. When M6. MEMORY 6  
a MCACC preset memory has  
been renamed, the name given is  
displayed.  
M1.MEMORY1  
ON  
to  
Reduction) background noise) when  
switched on.  
Default:  
M1. MEMORY 1  
DIALOG E Localizes dialog in the center  
OFF  
a
(Dialog  
channel to make it stand out from  
MCACC OFF  
ON  
Enhancement) other background sounds in a TV  
or movie soundtrack.  
EQ  
(Acoustic  
Switches on/off the effects of EQ  
Pro. only for the MCACC preset  
ON  
b
OFF  
HIBIT  
Creates a wider dynamic range  
OFF  
Calibration memory selected. This setting is  
(High Bit) with digital sources like CDs or  
DVDs (Smoother, more delicate  
musical expression can be  
EQ)  
available for each MCACC preset  
memory.  
ON  
S-WAVE  
Switches on/off the effects of  
ON  
achieved by requantizing 16 bit  
PCM or 20 bit compressed audio  
signals to 24 bits).  
(Standing Standing Wave Control only for  
Wave)  
OFF  
the MCACC preset memory  
selected. This setting is available  
for each MCACC preset memory.  
DUAL  
(Dual  
Mono)  
Specifies how dual mono  
encoded Dolby Digital  
soundtracks should be played.  
Dual mono is not widely used, but  
is sometimes necessary when  
two languages need to be sent to  
separate channels.  
CH1 –  
Channel 1 is  
heard only  
DELAY  
(Sound  
Delay)  
Some monitors have a slight  
delay when showing video, so the  
soundtrack will be slightly out of  
sync with the picture. By adding a  
bit of delay, you can adjust the  
sound to match the presentation  
of the video.  
0.0 to 6.0  
(frames)  
CH2 –  
Channel 2 is  
heard only  
1 second = 30  
frames (NTSC)  
Default: 0.0  
CH1 CH2 –  
Both channels  
heard from  
front speakers  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
11  
Setting  
DRC  
What it does  
Option(s)  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
c
h
Adjusts the level of dynamic  
Adjusts the center image to  
create a wider stereo effect with  
vocals. Adjust the effect from 0  
(all center channel sent to front  
right and left speakers) to 10  
(center channel sent to the center  
speaker only).  
0 to 10  
AUTO  
OFF  
C. IMAGE  
(Center  
Image)  
(Applicable  
only when  
using a  
(Dynamic range for movie soundtracks  
Range  
Control)  
Default: 3  
(Neo:6 Music),  
10 (Neo:6  
optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS,  
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,  
DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master  
Audio (you may need to use this  
feature when listening to  
MAX  
MID  
Cinema)  
center  
speaker)  
surround sound at low volumes).  
LFE ATT  
(LFE  
Some Dolby Digital and DTS  
audio sources include ultra-low  
0dB  
EFFECT  
Sets the effect level for the  
currently selected Advanced  
Surround mode (each mode can  
be set separately).  
10 to 90  
–5dB/ –10dB/  
–15dB/ –20dB/  
OFF  
Attenuate) bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator  
as necessary to prevent the ultra-  
low bass tones from distorting the  
sound from the speakers.  
a.When MCACC OFF is selected, all MCACC preset memories become  
deactivated.  
b.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light even when  
a MCACC preset memory is selected.  
c.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select  
MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.  
d.You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but  
if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting back to 0 dB.  
e.• HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing  
synchronized amp mode operations.  
The LFE is not limited when set to  
0 dB, which is the recommended  
value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB,  
–15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is  
limited by the respective degree.  
When OFF is selected, no sound  
is output from the LFE channel.  
• The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the  
receiver’s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV with the receiver’s  
power in the standby mode. See Synchronized amp mode on page 66.  
f. This feature is only available when the connected display supports the  
automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lip-sync’) for HDMI. If you  
find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A. DELAY to OFF and  
adjust the delay time manually. For more details about the lip-sync feature  
of your display, contact the manufacturer directly.  
g.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/  
Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.  
h.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema and Neo:6  
Music mode.  
SACD  
Brings out detail in SACDs by  
maximizing the dynamic range  
(during digital processing).  
0 to 6 (dB)  
d
GAIN  
Default: 0 (dB)  
e
Specifies the routing of the HDMI  
audio signal out of this receiver  
(amp) or through to a TV or flat  
panel TV. When THROUGH is  
selected, no sound is output from  
this receiver.  
AMP  
HDMI  
(HDMI  
Audio)  
THROUGH  
A. DELAY This feature automatically  
OFF  
(Auto  
delay)  
corrects the audio-to-video delay  
between components connected  
with an HDMI cable. The audio  
delay time is set depending on the  
operational status of the display  
connected with an HDMI cable.  
The video delay time is  
ON  
Setting the Video options  
There are a number of additional picture settings you can  
make using the Video Parameter menu. The defaults, if  
not stated, are listed in bold.  
automatically adjusted according  
Important  
f
to the audio delay time.  
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the Video  
Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current  
source, setting and status of the receiver.  
g
Provides a better blend of the  
front speakers by spreading the  
center channel between the front  
right and left speakers, making it  
sound wider (higher settings) or  
narrower (lower settings).  
0 to 7  
C. WIDTH  
(Center  
Width)  
Default: 3  
(Applicable  
only when  
using a  
1
2
Press RECEIVER, then press VIDEO PARAMETER  
.
Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.  
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,  
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the  
table below for notes on this.  
center  
speaker)  
g
Adjusts the depth of the surround  
sound balance from front to back,  
making the sound more distant  
(minus settings), or more forward  
(positive settings).  
–3 to +3  
DIMENSION  
Default: 0  
3
Use / to set it as necessary.  
See the table below for the options available for each  
1
setting.  
PANORAMAg  
Extends the front stereo image to  
include the surround speakers for  
a ‘wraparound’ effect.  
OFF  
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.  
ON  
Note  
1 Brightness, Contrast, Hue, Chroma, Resolution and Aspect can be set for each input source.  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
11  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
ON  
Making an audio or a video recording  
V. CONV  
(Digital  
Video  
Converts video signals for output  
from the MONITOR OUT jacks for  
all video types.  
You can make an audio or a video recording from the  
built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source  
OFF  
1
Conversion)  
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).  
BRIGHT  
(Brightness)  
Adjusts the overall brightness.  
–10 to +10  
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an  
analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the  
components you are recording to/from are hooked up in  
the same way (see Connecting your equipment on  
page 13 for more on connections).  
Default: 0  
CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast between  
–10 to +10  
light and dark.  
Default: 0  
HUE  
Adjusts the red/green balance.  
–10 to +10  
Since the video converter is not available when making  
recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use  
the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder  
as you used to connect your video source (the one you  
want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must  
connect your recorder using component if your source  
has also been connected using component.  
Default: 0  
CHROMA Adjusts saturation from dull to  
–10 to +10  
bright.  
Default: 0  
a
Specifies the output resolution of  
the video signal (when analog  
video input signals are output at  
the HDMI OUT connector, select  
this according to the resolution of  
your monitor and the images you  
wish to watch). When AUTO is  
selected, the resolution is  
automaticallyselected depending  
on the capability of the display  
connected to this receiver. When  
PURE is selected, the signals are  
output with the same resolution  
as when input.  
AUTO  
PURE  
RES  
(Resolution)  
480p/576p  
720p  
For more information about video connections, see  
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video  
sources on page 18.  
1080i  
AUTO/  
STEREO/  
BD MENU  
DIRECT  
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
1080p  
HDD  
THX  
DVD  
DVR 1  
FM/AM  
BD  
DVR 2  
XM  
TV  
HDMI  
STATUS  
PHASE  
CD  
CD-R  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
SIRIUS iPod USB  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
INPUT  
SELECT  
DIMMER  
RECEIVER  
1
2
3
GENRE  
MCACC  
SLEEP  
b
Specifies the aspect ratio when  
analog video input signals are  
output at the HDMI output. Make  
your desired settings while  
checking each setting on your  
display.  
THROUGH  
NORMAL  
ZOOM  
ASP  
1
Select the source you want to record.  
(Aspect)  
Use the input source buttons (or INPUT SELECT).  
• If necessary, press SIGNAL SEL to select the input  
signal corresponding to the source component (see  
Choosing the input signal on page 33 for more on  
this).  
a.When a resolution value is selected in this setting and the analog signals  
input are converted and output as HDMI signals, images may not appear  
depending on the video signals being input or the resolution of your  
monitor. Also, depending on the source component or the monitor being  
used, the output resolution may be different from this setting. Conversion  
to 1080p is available only for the input signals of 480i/576i/480p/576p.  
b.If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on  
the source component or on the monitor.  
2
Prepare the source you want to record.  
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD, etc.  
3
Prepare the recorder.  
Insert a blank tape, MD, video, etc. into the recording  
device and set the recording levels.  
Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if  
you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set  
the audio recording level automatically—check the  
component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.  
4
Start recording, then start playback of the source  
component.  
Note  
1 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the bass/treble controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.  
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.  
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
11  
Reducing the level of an analog signal  
Dimming the display  
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog  
signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find  
the that the OVER indicator is lights often, or you can  
You can choose between four brightness levels for the  
front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the  
display automatically brightens for a few seconds.  
1
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
hear distortion in the sound.  
MEM  
FM/AM  
XM  
SIRIUS iPod USB  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
1
GENRE  
4
2
MCACC  
5
3
SLEEP  
MEM  
INPUT  
SELECT  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
CH  
DIMMER  
RECEIVER  
6
1
2
3
SR+  
SBch  
A.ATT  
TV CTRL  
RECEIVER  
GENRE  
MCACC  
SLEEP  
7
8
9
CLASS  
4
SR+  
7
5
SBch  
8
6
A.ATT  
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
MAIN  
ZONE  
2
ENTER  
0
MAIN  
ZONE  
2
MASTER  
VOLUME  
INPUT  
•
Press RECEIVER, then press DIMMER repeatedly to  
change the brightness of the front panel display.  
•
Press RECEIVER, then press A.ATT to switch the  
input attenuator on or off.  
Switching the speaker impedance  
We recommend using speakers of 8 Ω with this system,  
but it is possible to switch the impedance setting if you  
plan to use speakers with a 6 Ω impedance rating. Use  
the front panel controls to do this.  
Using the sleep timer  
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a  
specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without  
worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use  
the remote control to set the sleep timer.  
•
With the receiver in standby, press STANDBY/  
ON while holding down the SPEAKERS button.  
Each time you do this, you switch between the  
impedance settings:  
MEM  
INPUT  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
CH  
SELECT  
DIMMER  
3
1
2
MCACC  
5
TV CTRL  
RECEIVER  
GENRE  
SLEEP  
4
SR+  
7
6
A.ATT  
• Speaker 6 Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are  
rated at 6 Ω.  
SBch  
8
9
CLASS  
MAIN  
ZONE  
2
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
ENTER  
0
• Speaker 8 Ω – Use this setting if your speakers are  
rated at 8 Ω or more.  
•
Press RECEIVER, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set  
the sleep time.  
60 min  
90 min  
30 min  
Off  
Checking your system settings  
Use the status display screen to check your current  
settings for features such as surround back channel  
processing and your current MCACC preset.  
• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time  
by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will  
cycle through the sleep options again.  
THX  
STATUS  
PHASE  
2
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
RECEIVER  
1
Press RECEIVER, then press STATUS to check the  
system settings.  
3
These appear on the front panel display.  
Note  
1 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct modes.  
2 You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.  
3 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
11  
The front panel display shows each of the following  
settings for three seconds each:  
Setting  
Default  
MULTI-ZONE  
Zone 2 Volume Type  
Zone 2 Volume  
SR+  
Input source  
Variable  
–60 dB  
↓
Surround Back Processing  
↓
MCACC preset  
SR+ Control On/Off  
SR+ Volume Control On/Off  
Monitor Out  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
↓
ZONE 2  
↓
HDMI Control  
DSP  
Surround back channel Processing  
Phase Control  
Sound Retriever  
Sound Delay  
ON  
2
When you’re finished, press STATUS again to  
switch off the display.  
ON  
OFF  
0.0 frame  
Resetting the system  
Dual Mono  
CH1  
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to  
the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.  
DRC  
OFF  
SACD Gain  
0 dB  
1
Switch the receiver into standby.  
LFE Attenuate  
Auto delay  
0 dB  
2
While holding down the front panel STEREO/A.L.C  
OFF  
button, press and hold STANDBY/ON for about two  
seconds.  
Digital Safety  
OFF  
The display shows RESET?.  
Effect Level  
Extended Stereo  
90  
3
Press the front panel AUTO SURR/STREAM DIRECT  
Other modes  
Center Width  
Dimension  
50  
button.  
The display shows OK.  
2 PL II Music  
Options  
3
0
4
Press SOUND RETRIEVER to confirm.  
Panorama  
OFF  
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver  
has been reset to the factory default settings.  
Neo:6 Options  
All Inputs  
Center Image  
3 (Neo:6 Music)  
10 (Neo:6  
Cinema)  
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the  
receiver is unplugged.  
Listening Mode  
(2 ch)  
AUTO  
SURROUND  
Default system settings  
Listening Mode  
(x ch)  
AUTO  
SURROUND  
Setting  
Default  
Amp  
HDMI Audio  
Listening Mode  
(HP)  
STEREO  
HDMI Control  
Digital Video Conversion  
Speakers  
ON  
See also Setting the Audio options on page 71 for other default  
ON  
DSP settings.  
A
MCACC  
Surround Back System  
Normal  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALLx2  
YES  
MCACC Position Memory  
Channel Level (M1–M6)  
Speaker Distance (M1–M6)  
M1: MEMORY 1  
0.0 dB  
Speaker System  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
SB  
10’00’’  
(10 ft. 00 in.)  
Standing Wave  
(M1–M6)  
ATT  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
SW  
SWch Wide Trim  
Crossover  
X-Curve  
Inputs  
80 Hz  
OFF  
EQ Data (M1–M6)  
All channels/bands 0.0 dB  
EQ Wide Trim 0.0 dB  
See Input function default and possible settings on page 68.  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
12  
Chapter 12:  
Controlling the rest of your system  
3
Use the number buttons to enter the 3 digit preset  
code (see below).  
Setting the remote to control other  
components  
The indicator blinks for half a second after you input each  
digit and shows a long, two second blink once you have  
entered a valid code. If the LED blinks three times, it  
means an invalid code has been input or an error has  
occurred.  
Most components can be assigned to one of the input  
source buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the  
component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the  
remote.  
4
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other components  
However, there are cases where only certain functions  
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset  
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote  
control will not work for the model that you are using.  
you want to control.  
5
When you’re done, press RECEIVER.  
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or  
off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE. If it doesn’t  
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there  
is one).  
Note  
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing  
RECEIVER. To go back a step, press RETURN.  
• After one minute of inactivity, the remote  
automatically exits the operation.  
Preset code list  
You should have no problem controlling a component if  
you find the manufacturer in this list, but please note that  
there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the  
list will not work for the model that you are using. There  
are also cases where only certain functions may be  
controllable after assigning the proper preset code.  
Selecting preset codes directly  
ST  
ENTER  
ST  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
CATEGORY  
RETURN  
SETUP TUNE  
iPod CTRL  
DVD  
SAT  
DVD  
DVR 1  
FM/AM  
BD  
DVR 2  
XM  
TV  
CD  
HDMI  
CD-R  
Manufacturer Code  
AKAI 007  
Manufacturer Code  
BELL 208  
AUTO/  
STEREO/  
BD MENU  
DIRECT  
A.L.C. STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
DENON 003, 010  
GOLDSTAR 014  
ECHOSTAR 205  
PIONEER 200, 210  
PRIMESTAR 206  
RCA 201, 203, 209  
SONY 202  
HDD  
SIRIUS iPod USB  
THX  
STATUS  
PHASE  
HITACHI 012  
INPUT  
SELECT  
DIMMER  
JVC 004  
ANT  
MPX SIGNAL SEL  
MEM  
1
GENRE  
2
3
SLEEP  
LOEWE 013  
MCACC  
AUDIO  
TV CTRL  
DISPLAY  
CH  
MICROSOFT 017 (video game)  
PANASONIC 003, 019  
PHILIPS 013  
4
SR+  
7
5
6
A.ATT  
CD  
SBch  
8
RECEIVER  
Manufacturer Code  
California Audio labs 304  
DENON 309  
9
CLASS  
PIONEER 000, 003, 009, 018, 020,  
021 (BDP), 023 (BDP)  
RCA 008, 011  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
ENTER  
0
MASTER  
VOLUME  
JVC 303  
KENWOOD 310, 311, 321  
KODAK 322  
INPUT  
MAIN  
SAMSUNG 005  
SHARP 006  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
The indicator on the remote control blinks.  
.
SONY 002, 016 (video game)  
THOMSON 015  
MARANTZ 304, 312, 323, 324  
MCS 304  
TOSHIBA 001, 022 (HD DVD)  
ZENITH 014  
MEMOREX 300  
NAD 316  
2
Press the input source button for the component  
you want to control.  
ONKYO 307, 308, 320  
OPTIMUS 300  
LD  
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, press TV  
Manufacturer Code  
KENWOOD 103  
MITSUBISHI 100  
PANASONIC 105, 106  
PHILIPS 104  
PANASONIC 304, 326  
PHILIPS 312, 322  
CTRL here.  
PIONEER 300, 348 (SACD)  
QUASAR 304  
1
The indicator lights up.  
RCA 302, 313, 319  
SANYO 313  
PIONEER 100, 111  
RCA 107  
SONY 101  
SONY 301, 316, 317, 318  
TEAC 305, 306, 324, 325, 327  
THOMSON 319  
YAMAHA 314, 315, 328  
Note  
1 You can’t assign the RECEIVER, FM/AM, iPod USB, XM or SIRIUS buttons.  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
12  
PATHE MARCONI 417  
HCM 618  
DVR  
CD-R  
PENTAX 406  
HISAWA 618  
Manufacturer Code  
PANASONIC 491, 492  
PIONEER 480, 481, 482, 483, 484,  
487, 488, 489, 493  
Manufacturer Code  
PHILIPS 346  
PERDIO 441  
PHILIPS 414, 428  
PHONOLA 414  
HITACHI 606, 610, 618, 624, 625,  
634, 635, 664  
PIONEER 345  
YAMAHA 347  
HYPSON 618  
PIONEER 400, 407, 414, 437, 438,  
439  
IMPERIAL 635  
SHARP 496  
INTERFUNK 635  
TV  
SONY 490, 494  
PROLINE 441  
ITC 635  
TOSHIBA 485, 495  
Manufacturer Code  
AIWA 660  
PYE 414  
JVC 613, 623, 665, 683  
KAISUI 618  
QUELLE 414  
DTV  
AKAI 635  
ALBA 607  
RADIOLA 414  
KENDO 635  
Manufacturer Code  
PANASONIC 230  
PIONEER 207, 229  
RCA 401, 405, 406, 408, 411, 413,  
414, 415, 435, 460, 461, 462, 463  
REX 417, 428  
KENNEDY 635  
AMSTRAD 635  
AUDIOGONIC 607, 634  
BAUR 607, 635  
BEON 607  
LOEWE 607  
LUXOR 635  
ROADSTAR 411  
SABA 417, 428  
SAISHO 424  
SALORA 409  
SANSUI 407, 417  
SANYO 410, 412, 425, 435  
SBR 414  
MAGNAVOX 603, 607, 610, 612,  
629  
VCR  
BLUE STAR 618  
BPL 618  
BRANDT 634  
BUSH 607, 635  
CATHAY 607  
CENTURION 607  
CGB 635  
CLARIVOX 607  
CRYSTAL 635  
Manufacturer Code  
AIWA 441  
MATSUI 635  
M-ELECTRONIC 634, 636  
MITSUBISHI 602, 609, 610, 621, 682  
NEC 659  
AKAI 417  
ALBA 424  
AMSTRAD 441  
NOKIA 632, 635  
ASA 411, 414  
SCHAUB LORENZ 417, 441  
SCHNEIDER 414, 441  
SEI 414  
NORDENTE 636  
BAIRD 417, 441  
ORION 607  
BLAUPUNKT 408, 417, 432  
BRANDT ELECTRONIQUE 417  
BUSH 424  
PANASONIC 607, 608, 622, 635, 671  
PHILCO 635  
SELECO 417  
DAEWOO 607, 676, 677  
DANSAI 607  
SHARP 402, 418, 419  
SIEMENS 411  
PHILIPS 607  
CGB 441  
DECCA 414, 441  
DUAL 417  
DUMONT 414, 441  
FERGUSON 417  
FIDELITY 441  
PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 634, 635,  
636, 637, 638, 639, 667, 668, 669,  
670, 678, 679, 688, 689  
PROFEX 635  
DECCA 607  
SINGER 405  
SINUDYNE 414  
DIXI 607  
ELIN 607  
SONY 408, 416, 417, 457, 458, 459,  
404 (Beta)  
EMERSON 635  
EPSON 681  
PROTECH 635  
RADIOLA 607  
RADIOSHACK 602, 610, 621, 623  
RCA 601, 609, 610, 615, 616, 617,  
618  
SUNSTAR 441  
SUNTRONIC 441  
TASHIKO 441  
ERRES 607  
FINLANDIA 414  
FINLUX 406, 414, 441  
FIRST LINE 405, 409, 411, 424  
FISHER 410, 412, 420, 425, 426, 427  
FUNAI 441  
FERGUSON 607, 634, 636  
FINLUX 607  
TATUNG 414, 417, 441  
TELEAVIA 417  
FORMENTI 607, 635  
FRONTECH 635  
FUNAI 629, 658  
GBC 635  
SABA 634, 635, 636  
SAMSUNG 607, 673, 674, 675  
SANYO 614, 621, 685  
SCHNEIDER 607  
TELEFUNKEN 417, 428  
TENSAI 441  
GBC 414  
GOLDSTAR 409, 411  
GOODMANS 411, 441  
GRADIENTE 441  
GRAETZ 417  
THOMSON 417, 428  
THORN 417  
GE 600, 602, 607, 608, 610, 611, 617,  
618, 628  
GEC 607  
SHARP 602, 619, 627, 661  
SONY 604, 684  
TOSHIBA 405, 409, 414, 417, 426,  
428  
TELEAVIA 634  
GENERAL 629, 666  
GOLDSTAR 602, 607, 610, 623, 621  
GOODMAN 607  
GRAETZ 635  
GRANADA 607, 635  
GRANDIENTE 630  
GRANDIN 618  
HANSEATIC 607, 635  
GRANADA 414  
UNIVERSUM 411, 414, 441  
ZENITH 403, 404, 417  
TELEFUNKEN 634  
THOMSON 636  
GRANDIG 408, 414, 441  
GRANDIN 411, 441  
HITACHI 401, 406, 408, 417, 434,  
436, 441  
TOMASHI 618  
CATV  
TOSHIBA 602, 605, 621, 626, 663  
UNIDEN 687  
Manufacturer Code  
IMPERIAL 441  
YAMAHA 686  
ZENITH 603, 620  
GENERAL INSTRUMENT 701  
JERROLD 701, 702, 703, 704, 711,  
712, 713, 714, 715, 716  
INTERFUNK 414  
ITT 417, 428  
ITV 411  
PIONEER 700, 718  
JVC 407, 408, 414, 417, 428, 429,  
430, 431  
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 701  
S.ATLANTA 705, 706, 708, 709  
ZENITH 707, 710, 717  
KENDO 424  
LOEWE 414, 432  
LUXOR 409  
Controls for TVs  
TAPE  
This remote control can control components after  
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the  
commands (see Setting the remote to control other  
components on page 76 for more on this). Use the input  
source buttons to select the component.  
MAGNAVOX 403, 408, 414, 426  
MANESTH 405  
MARANTZ 414  
MATSUI 424  
MEMOREX 411, 441  
METZ 432  
M-ELECTRONIC 441  
MITSUBISHI 407, 408, 409, 414,  
420, 421, 422, 423, 424  
MULTITECH 441  
MURRHY 441  
NBC 417  
NECKERMANN 414  
NOKIA 417  
Manufacturer Code  
ARCAM 810  
DENON 810  
FISHER 813  
JVC 802  
KENWOOD 804, 807  
ONKYO 808, 809  
OPTIMUS 800  
PIONEER 800, 814  
SONY 801, 806  
TEAC 805  
• The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are  
dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL  
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the  
TV CTRL button.  
TECHNICS 803  
YAMAHA 811, 812  
NORDMENDE 417, 428  
OCEANIC 417, 441  
OPTIMUS 402, 408, 418, 419, 432,  
433  
MD  
Manufacturer Code  
DENON 906  
KENWOOD 903  
ONKYO 905  
ORION 424, 445, 446  
OSAKI 411, 441  
PIONEER 900, 907, 908  
SHARP 902  
OTTO VERSAND 414  
PALLADIUM 411, 417  
PANASONIC 408, 432, 433  
SONY 901  
TEAC 904  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
12  
Button(s) Function  
Components  
Controls for other components  
TV  
Press to switch the component  
Cable TV/  
This remote control can control these components after  
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the  
commands (see Setting the remote to control other  
components on page 76 for more on this). Use the input  
source buttons to select the component.  
assigned to the TV CTRL button Satellite TV/TV/  
on or off.  
DTV  
INPUT  
CH +/–  
VOL +/–  
Switches the TV input. (Not  
possible with all models.)  
Cable TV/  
Satellite TV/TV/  
DTV  
Button(s) Function  
Components  
Selects channels.  
Cable TV/  
Satellite TV/TV/  
DTV  
SOURCEPress to switch the component  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
BD/DVR  
between standby and on.  
Adjust the TV volume.  
Cable TV/  
Satellite TV/TV/  
DTV  
player/  
Cassette deck  
Press to return to the start of the CD/MD/CD-R/  
SOURCESwitches the DTV on or off.  
DTV  
current track or chapter.  
DVD/LD/BD  
player  
Switches the TV or CATV between Cable TV/  
standby and on.  
Repeated presses skips to the  
start of previous tracks or  
chapters.  
Satellite TV/TV  
Switches the DTV on or off.  
DTV  
Press to advance to the start of  
the next track or chapter.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
DVD/LD/BD  
player  
Press to get information on DTV DTV  
programs.  
Repeated presses skips to the  
start of following tracks or  
chapters.  
AUTO/  
DIRECT  
Use to choose the BLUE  
commands on a DTV menu.  
DTV  
DTV  
DTV  
DTV  
ADV SURR  
Use to choose the YELLOW  
commands on a DTV menu.  
Pause playback or recording.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
BD/DVR  
STEREO/  
A.L.C.  
Use to choose the RED  
commands on a DTV menu.  
player/  
Cassette deck  
STANDARD  
Use to choose the GREEN  
commands on a DTV menu.  
Start playback.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
BD/DVR  
AUDIO  
ANT  
Use to switch DTV audio tracks. DTV  
Use to select the VHF/UHF  
antennas or Cable TV.  
Cable TV/TV  
player/  
Cassette deck  
TOOLS  
EXIT  
Use to display the TOOLS menu TV  
on the flat panel TV.  
Hold down for fast forward  
playback.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
BD/DVR  
player/  
Cassette deck  
Use to return to the normal  
screen in one step.  
TV  
RETURN  
Use to select RETURN or EXIT.  
DTV  
Hold down for fast reverse  
playback.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
BD/DVR  
player/  
Cassette deck  
Number  
buttons  
Use to select a specific TV  
channel.  
Cable TV/  
Satellite TV/TV/  
DTV  
D.ACCESS Use to add a decimal point when DTV  
selecting a TV channel.  
Stops playback.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
BD/DVR  
ENTER/  
CLASS  
Use to enter a channel.  
Cable TV/  
Satellite TV/TV/  
DTV  
player/  
Cassette deck  
MENU  
Select different menus from the DTV  
DTV functions.  
Number  
buttons  
Directly access tracks on a  
program source.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/LD/BD  
player  
Select the menu screen.  
Cable TV/  
Satellite TV/TV  
Use the number buttons to  
navigate the on-screen display.  
DVD/DVR  
player  
///  
Select, adjust and navigate items Cable TV/  
& ENTER on the menu screen.  
Satellite TV/TV/  
DTV  
D.ACCESS Selects tracks higher than 10. (For CD/MD/CD-R/  
example, press +10, then 3 to  
VCR/LD player  
select track 13.)  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
12  
Button(s) Function  
Components  
Operating other Pioneer components  
with this receiver’s sensor  
ENTER/  
CLASS  
Chooses the disc.  
Multiple CD  
player  
Use as the ENTER button.  
VCR/DVD/BD  
player  
Many Pioneer components have CONTROL jacks which  
can be used to link components together so that you can  
use just the remote sensor of one component. When you  
use a remote control, the control signal is passed along  
Displays the setup screen for DVR DVR player  
players.  
1
Changes sides of the LD.  
TOPMENU Displays the disc ‘top’ menu of a DVD/BD/DVR  
DVD player. player  
Displays menus concerning the DVD/BD/DVR  
LD player  
the chain to the appropriate component.  
Important  
MENU  
• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you  
also have at least one set of analog audio, video or  
HDMI jacks connected to another component for  
grounding purposes.  
current DVD or DVR you are  
using.  
player  
Pauses the tape.  
Stops the tape.  
Starts playback.  
Cassette deck  
Cassette deck  
Cassette deck  
Cassette deck  
1
Decide which component you want to use the  
ENTER  
/  
remote sensor of.  
When you want to control any component in the chain,  
this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the  
corresponding remote control.  
Fast rewinds/fast forwards the  
tape.  
///  
& ENTER  
Navigates DVD menu/options.  
DVD/DVR  
player  
2
Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component  
to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.  
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the  
connection.  
CH +/–  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
HDD  
Selects channels.  
VCR/DVD/DVR  
player  
Changes the audio language or DVD/BD/DVR  
channel.  
player  
Press to display information.  
DVD/BD/DVR  
player  
CONTROL  
HDMI  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
2
VI  
Switches to the hard disk controls DVR player  
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
IN  
2
(CD)  
BD IN  
AU  
L
DVD  
Switches to the DVD controls  
DVR player  
XM IN  
CON- IN  
TROL  
OPTICAL  
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.  
IN  
1
OUT  
IN  
IN  
1
(TV SAT)  
R
IN  
2
IR  
(DVR1)  
ZONE2  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
2
-
2
ASSIGN-  
ABLE  
OUT  
1
-
2
OUT  
L
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
R
IN  
OUT  
3
Continue the chain in the same way for as many  
components as you have.  
Note  
1 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, refer to Setting the remote to control other components on page 76.  
If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this receiver using the remote sensor.  
• See Using this receiver with a Pioneer flat panel TV on page 63 if you are connecting a Pioneer flat panel TV.  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Chapter 13:  
Additional information  
Troubleshooting  
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with  
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other  
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks  
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.  
Power  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The power does not turn on.  
• Make sure that the power cable is plugged in to an active power outlet.  
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.  
The receiver suddenly switches • Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of  
off or the PHASE CONTROL  
indicator blinks.  
wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.  
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized  
independent service company.  
During loud playback the  
• Turn down the volume.  
power suddenly switches off.  
• Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 41.  
• Try switching on the digital safety feature (put the receiver into standby, hold down the  
ADVANCED/SURROUND button on the front panel and press STANDBY/ON to switch between  
SAFETY 1 ON (medium effect), SAFETY 2 ON (more effect) and SAFETY OFF). If the power switches  
off even with SAFETY 2 ON, turn down the volume. With SAFETY 1 ON or SAFETY 2 ON on, some  
features may be unavailable.  
The unit does not respond  
• Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.  
when the buttons are pressed.  
• Try disconnecting the power cable, then connect again.  
AMP ERR blinks in the display, • The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer  
then the power automatically authorized independent service company for help.  
switches off. The MCACC  
blinks and the power does not  
turn on.  
AMP OVERHEAT blinks in the • Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on. Check the safety  
display, then the power  
precautions on page 2 for information on improving heat dispersal.  
automatically switches off.  
The receiver suddenly switches • The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer  
off or DIGITAL PRECISION  
authorized independent service company for help.  
PROCESSING indicator blinks.  
No sound  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound is output when an  
input source is selected.  
• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).  
• Make sure the correct input source is selected.  
No sound output from the front  
speakers.  
• Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.  
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL). Note that when PCM is  
selected, you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.  
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on  
page 13).  
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 21).  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound from the surround or • Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected;  
center speakers.  
select one of the surround listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 30).  
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 48).  
• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 49).  
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 21).  
No sound from surround back • Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see Speaker Setting on  
speakers.  
page 48).  
• Make sure surround back processing is set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel  
processing on page 33).  
• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS-ES with no flag to indicate 6.1 compatibility, then with  
surround back processing set to SBch Auto, there will be no sound from the surround back  
speakers. In this case, set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 33).  
• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround back processing is set  
to SBch ON and a surround mode is selected (see Listening in surround sound on page 30).  
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 21). If only one surround  
back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.  
No sound from subwoofer.  
• Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.  
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.  
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 48).  
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of  
your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 48).  
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings  
to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on  
page 48).  
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options  
on page 71).  
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 49).  
No sound from one speaker.  
• Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 21).  
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 49).  
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 48).  
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening  
mode, you may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 30).  
Sound is produced from  
analog components, but not  
from digital ones (DVD, LD, CD-  
ROM, etc.).  
• Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 33).  
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected  
to (see The Input Setup menu on page 67).  
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.  
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.  
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input source.  
No sound is output or a noise is • Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.  
output when Dolby Digital/DTS  
software is played back.  
• Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set  
to On.  
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.  
No sound when using the  
• If the HDMI input source is selected, sound is muted until exiting either menu.  
System Setup or Status menu.  
• If sound is muted in the sub zone (ZONE 2), it will be restored after exiting the System Setup menu.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Other audio problems  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Broadcast stations cannot be For FM broadcasts  
selected automatically, or  
there is considerable noise in  
radio broadcasts.  
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.  
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 23).  
For AM broadcasts  
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.  
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 23).  
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor,  
etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.  
A multichannel DVD source  
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the multichannel analog  
appears to be downmixed to 2 inputs on page 58).  
channels during playback.  
Noise is output when scanning • This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital  
a DTS CD.  
information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when  
scanning.  
When playing a DTS format LD • Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 33).  
there is audible noise on the  
soundtrack.  
Can’t record audio.  
• You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an  
analog source.  
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.  
• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks (see Connecting  
analog audio sources on page 20).  
Subwoofer output is very low. • To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL (see  
Speaker Setting on page 48).  
Everything seems to be set up • The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the  
correctly, but the playback  
sound is odd.  
receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the  
speakers on page 21).  
The PHASE CONTROL feature • If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is  
doesn’t seem to have an  
audible effect.  
set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or  
depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).  
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on  
page 50).  
Noise or hum can be heard  
even when there is no sound  
being input.  
• Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source  
are not causing interference.  
There seems to be a time lag  
• See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 10 to set up your system  
between the speakers and the again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).  
output of the subwoofer.  
Can’t use the SR+ features.  
• Make sure that HDMI Control is set to OFF (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on page 65).  
The maximum volume  
• This is not a malfunction. If the levels in Channel Level on page 49 have been adjusted, the  
maximum volume will change accordingly.  
available (shown in the front  
panel display) is lower than the  
+12dB maximum.  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Video  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No image is output when an  
input is selected.  
• Check the video connections of the source component (see page 18).  
• For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion  
is switched off (in Setting the Video options on page 72), you must connect your TV to this receiver  
using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.  
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component or HDMI  
cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 67).  
• Check the video output settings of the source component.  
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.  
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If  
adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 72) and/or the  
resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video  
Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 72) OFF.  
Can’t record video.  
• Check that the source is not copy-protected.  
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video  
cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to  
this receiver.  
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted • Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the  
picture.  
video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may  
also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect  
the source and display device using the same type of connection (component or composite), then  
start playback again.  
Settings  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The Auto MCACC Setup  
continually shows an error.  
• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see  
also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 11). If the noise level cannot be kept low  
enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 41).  
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single)  
terminals.  
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the  
surround back channel.  
• Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.  
After using the Auto MCACC • There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc.  
Setup, the speaker size setting Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.  
is incorrect.  
• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some  
cases. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 48, and use the ALL (Keep  
SP System) option for the Custom Menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 38 if this is a  
recurring problem.  
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker • Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are  
Distance setting (page 42)  
properly.  
matched up properly).  
The display shows KEY LOCK • With the receiver in standby, press STANDBY/ON while holding down the SPEAKERS button to  
ON when you try to make  
disable the key lock.  
settings.  
Most recent settings have been • The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.  
erased.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The EQ response displayed in • There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJUST in the  
the graphical output following Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve  
calibration does not appear  
entirely flat.  
optimal sound.  
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment  
needed.  
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.  
EQ adjustments made using  
• Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these  
the Manual MCACC setup on adjustments in the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken this into account by the  
page 41 do not appear to  
filters dedicated to overall system calibration.  
change the graphical output.  
Lower frequency response  
curves do not seem to have  
been calibrated for SMALL  
speakers.  
• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers  
that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.  
• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable  
sound is output for display.  
Display  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The display is dark or off.  
• Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.  
• Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.  
After making an adjustment  
the display goes off.  
You can’t get DIGITAL to  
display when using the  
SIGNAL SEL button.  
• Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The  
Input Setup menu on page 67).  
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input source.  
The Dolby/DTS indicator  
doesn’t light when playing  
Dolby/DTS software.  
• These indicators do dot light if playback is paused.  
• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.  
When playing a DVD-Audio  
disc, the DVD player display  
shows 96 kHz. However, the  
receiver’s display does not.  
• This is not a malfunction. 96 kHz audio from DVD-Audio discs is only output from the analog  
outputs of the DVD player. This receiver cannot show the playback sample rate when using the  
analog inputs.  
During playback of a DTS 96/24 • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 33).  
source, the display doesn’t  
show 96 kHz.  
When playing Dolby Digital or • Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.  
DTS sources, the receiver’s  
format indicators do not light.  
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 33).  
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.  
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.  
When playing certain discs,  
none of the receiver’s format  
indicators light.  
• The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what  
audio tracks are recorded on the disc.  
When playing a disc with the • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 33).  
listening mode set to Auto  
Surround, the 2 PL II or Neo:6  
indicator lights on the receiver.  
• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is  
not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.  
During playback of a Surround • The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is 6.1  
EX or DTS-ES source on the  
SBch AUTO setting, the EX  
and ES indicators don’t light, or  
the signal is not properly  
processed.  
compatible. Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 33), then switch  
to the Standard EX listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 30).  
During playback of DVD-Audio, • This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a  
the display shows PCM.  
malfunction.  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Remote control  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Cannot be remote controlled. • Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 8).  
• Be sure to operate within 7 m (23 feet) and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see  
Operating range of remote control unit on page 26).  
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.  
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.  
• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer components with this  
receiver’s sensor on page 79).  
Other components can’t be  
operated with the system  
remote.  
• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.  
• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.  
The SR cable is connected, but • Reinsert the SR cable, making sure it’s connected to the right jack (see Using this receiver with a  
the connected components  
can’t be operated with the  
remote.  
Pioneer flat panel TV on page 63).  
• Make sure that there is an analog or HDMI connection between the units. This is necessary for the  
SR feature to work.  
• Check that the other component is made by Pioneer. The SR feature only works with Pioneer  
equipment.  
USB interface  
Symptom  
Remedy  
USB mass storage device is  
not recognized by the receiver.  
• Try switching the receiver off, then on again.  
• Make sure you have completely inserted the USB connector to this receiver.  
• Check that the memory format is FAT16 or FAT32 (FAT12, NTFS and HFS are not supported).  
• USB devices with an internal USB hub are not supported.  
USB ERROR3 shows in the  
display when connecting a  
USB device.  
• If this message continues to appear after going through all the checks in Important on page 53 of  
Connecting a USB device, take the unit to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your  
dealer for servicing.  
Can’t play audio files.  
• The WMA or MPEG-4 AAC files were recorded using DRM (digital rights management), or the bit  
rate/sampling rate is not compatible (see Compressed audio compatibility on page 54). This is not a  
malfunction.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
HDMI  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The HDMI indicator blinks  
continuously.  
• Check all the points below.  
No picture or sound.  
• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-  
compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component or composite video jacks.  
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver  
(even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component or composite video jacks  
between source and receiver.  
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,  
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.  
• If video images do not appear on your TV or flat panel TV, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor  
or other setting for your component.  
• If ‘NOT SUPPORT’ appears in the receiver’s display, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor or  
other setting for your component.  
• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio  
output.  
• When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI setting set to  
THROUGH, you cannot hear audio output from all channels. In this case, make a digital or analog  
audio connection.  
• To output signals in DeepColor, use an HDMI cable (high speed HDMI cable) to connect this  
receiver to a component or TV with the DeepColor feature.  
No picture.  
• Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 72).  
No sound, or sound suddenly • Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.  
ceases.  
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.  
• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.  
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.  
Noisy or distorted picture.  
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the  
video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may  
also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect  
the source and display device using the same type of connection (component or composite), then  
start playback again.  
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,  
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.  
HDCP ERROR shows in the  
display.  
• Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible  
with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component or  
composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be  
displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Configuration B  
Important information regarding the HDMI  
Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the  
display using an HDMI cable. Then use the most  
convenient connection (digital is recommended) for  
sending audio to the receiver. See the operating  
instructions for more on audio connections. Set the  
display volume to minimum when using this  
configuration.  
connection  
There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI  
signals through this receiver (this depends on the HDMI-  
equipped component you are connecting–check with the  
manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information).  
If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this  
receiver (from your component), please try one of the  
following configurations when connecting up.  
Note  
Configuration A  
• If your display only has one HDMI terminal, you can  
only receive HDMI video from the connected  
component.  
Use component video cables to connect the video output  
of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s  
component video input. The receiver can then convert the  
analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal  
for transmission to the display. For this configuration,  
use the most convenient connection (digital is  
recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the  
operating instructions for more on audio connections.  
• Depending on the component, audio output may be  
limited to the number of channels available from the  
connected display unit (for example audio output is  
reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio  
limitations).  
• If you want to switch the input source, you’ll have to  
switch functions on both the receiver and your  
display unit.  
Note  
• The picture quality will change slightly during  
conversion.  
• Since the sound is muted on the display when using  
the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on  
the display every time you switch input sources.  
XM radio messages  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action  
Check XM Tuner  
The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed or not fully seated Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock  
in the XM Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM Mini-Tuner  
dock is not connected to this receiver.  
and check the XM Mini-Tuner dock cable is  
connected to this receiver.  
Check Antenna  
Loading  
The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini-  
Tuner Dock or the XM antenna cable is damaged.  
Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to  
the XM Mini-Tuner Dock and check the antenna  
cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna if the  
cable is damaged.  
The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or program  
information from the XM satellite signal. This  
message can also occur in weak XM signal  
conditions.  
This message should disappear in a few seconds in  
good signal conditions.  
If you see this message often, reposition the XM  
antenna for better signal reception.  
Note that this receiver may not respond to some  
buttons while this message is displayed.  
Use the Antenna Aiming option to optimize the  
antenna position.  
No Signal  
The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the XM satellite Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the  
signal. Something may be blocking the XM XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the  
antenna’s view of the satellites or the antenna is not Antenna Aiming option to optimize the antenna  
properly aimed.  
position.  
See instructions supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner  
and Dock for antenna installation information.  
Off Air  
You selected an XM channel that is not currently  
broadcasting.  
Check back later; in the mean time, select another  
channel.  
CH Unauthorized  
You selected an XM channel that is blocked or  
cannot be receive with your XM subscription  
package.  
Consult the latest channel guide at  
www.xmradio.com for the current list of channels.  
For information on receiving this channel, visit  
www.xmradio.com or contact XM Satellite Radio at  
1-800-967-2346.  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action  
CH Unavailable  
The selected channel is not available. The channel Consult the latest channel guide at  
may have been reassigned to a different channel  
number.  
www.xmradio.com for the current list of channels.  
For cases of a new radio or a radio that has not  
received XM’s signal for an extended period, allow  
the radio to receive the XM satellite signal for at least  
5 minutes and then try to select the channel again.  
This message may occur initially with a new radio or  
a radio that has not received XM’s signal for an  
extended period.  
– – – – – – – –  
No artist name or song title is available for this  
selection.  
No action required.  
Upgrade XM Tuner  
The connected XM CNP-1000 is incompatible. This Contact XM Listener Care (1-800-967-2346) and ask  
receiver features advanced technology that is  
designed for use with the XM Mini-Tuner.  
about upgrading your XM CNP-1000 to an XM Mini-  
Tuner.  
Have this receiver’s model name and CNP-1000 XM  
Radio ID number ready beforehand, and explain that  
this receiver is displaying the message Upgrade XM  
Tuner.  
If you already have an XM Mini-Tuner connected and  
you see this message, turn off this receiver, make  
sure the XM Mini-Tuner is properly seated in the  
Mini-Tuner Dock, and then turn this receiver On  
again. If the message reappears, contact XM  
Listener Care and explain the issue that you’re  
experiencing and the corrective actions you’ve tried.  
XM Power Error  
A short-circuit occurring in the antenna or  
surrounding antenna cable.  
Make sure that there is nothing unusual with the  
antenna or antenna cable. Switch the power off,  
then back on again.  
SIRIUS radio messages  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action  
Antenna Error  
Check Sirius Tuner  
Antenna is not properly connected.  
SIRIUS Connect tuner is not properly connected.  
Check that the antenna cable is attached securely.  
Check that the 8 pin mini DIN cable and AC Adapter  
are attached securely.  
Acquiring Signal  
The SIRIUS signal is too weak at the current location. n/a  
Subscription Updating Unit is updating subscription.  
Wait until the encryption code has been updated.  
Wait until the encryption code has been updated.  
Select another channel.  
Updating Channels  
Invalid Channel  
Unit is updating channels.  
Selected channel is not available/does not exist.  
Note  
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug  
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Surround sound formats  
13  
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds  
surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,  
which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for  
enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.  
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound  
formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and  
terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.  
Dolby Digital Plus  
Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio  
technology for all high-definition programming and  
media. It combines the efficiency to meet future  
broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to  
realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming  
high-definition era. Built on Dolby Digital, the multi-  
channel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts  
worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the next-  
generation A/V receivers but remains fully compatible  
with all current A/V receivers.  
Dolby  
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See  
www.dolby.com for more detailed information.  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs of  
up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs in a  
single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate  
potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate  
performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps on  
Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams for  
playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby Digital  
Plus can accurately reproduce the sound originally intended  
by directors and producers.  
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding  
system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD  
and digital broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six  
discrete audio channels, comprising five full range  
channels and a special LFE (low frequency effects)  
channel used mainly for deep, rumbling sound effects;  
hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby Digital.  
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital  
decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono,  
stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit  
rates and channels. Another feature, called Dialog  
Normalization, attenuates programs based on the  
average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak  
level (also known as Dialnorm) in order to achieve  
uniform playback level.  
It also features multi-channel sound with discrete  
channel output, interactive mixing and streaming  
capability in advanced systems. Supported by High-  
Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital  
connection is possible for high-definition audio and  
video.  
Dolby TrueHD  
Dolby Digital Surround EX  
Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding  
technology developed for high-definition optical discs in  
the upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing  
sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master,  
unlocking the true high-definition entertainment  
experience on high-definition optical discs in the next  
generation. When coupled with high-definition video,  
Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater  
experience with stunning sound and high-definition  
picture.  
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended)  
is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a  
surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/  
right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for  
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as  
well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby  
Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using  
the innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system  
extracts surround sound from sources as follows:  
It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8  
full-range channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz  
audio. It also features extensive metadata including  
dialogue normalization and dynamic range control.  
Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a  
single-cable digital connection is possible for high-  
definition audio and video.  
• Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono  
surround) from any stereo source  
• Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo  
surround) from any stereo source  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx – 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound  
(stereo surround and surround back) from two  
channel or 5.1 (and 6.1) channel sources  
* HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit  
their maximum number of audio channels to eight,  
whereas Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD  
support more than eight audio channels.  
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is  
generated by bass management in the receiver.  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
DTS-EXPRESS  
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology  
supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer  
rates. This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD  
DVD and secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting  
the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and  
memory audio contents.  
DTS  
The DTS technologies are explained below. See  
www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers  
master audio sources recorded in a professional studio  
to listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio  
quality. DTS-HD Master Audio adopts variable data  
transfer rates, facilitating data transfer to the maximum  
rate of 24.5 Mbps in the Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in  
the HD-DVD format, which by far exceeds that of a  
standard DVD. These high data transfer rates enable  
lossless transmission of 96 kHz/24-bit 7.1-channel audio  
sources without deteriorating the quality of the original  
sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is an irreplaceable  
technology that can reproduce sound faithfully as  
intended by the creator of music or movies.  
DTS Digital Surround  
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding  
system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video,  
DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and  
video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio  
channels, comprising five full range channels, including  
an LFE channel. Higher sound quality is achieved  
through the use of a low compression rate, and high  
rates of transmittance during playback.  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:  
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616;  
6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued &  
pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos,  
Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are  
trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights  
Reserved.  
DTS-ES  
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a  
decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES  
Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.  
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with  
a completely separate (discrete) surround back channel.  
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed  
into the surround left/right channels. Both sources are  
also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel  
decoder.  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a  
discrete surround format developed by Microsoft  
Corporation.  
DTS Neo:6  
DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound  
from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV)  
and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel  
information already encoded into the source, as well as  
its own processing to determine channel localization  
(with two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is  
generated by bass management in the receiver). Two  
modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS  
Neo:6 with two channel sources.  
WMA9 Pro can support up to 5.1/7.1 channel playback  
with sampling rates up to 24-bit/96 kHz. Using the unique  
WMA compression techniques, WMA9 Pro can deliver  
multichannel music and soundtracks over high-speed  
internet networks at low bit rates with minimal audio  
degradation. Playback may be enjoyed with the Windows  
Media™ Player 9 Series (or above) and other third-party  
media players on a personal computer, or with an AV  
amplifier with on-board WMA9 Pro decoding.  
DTS 96/24  
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital  
Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio  
using a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully  
backward compatible with all existing decoders. This  
means that DVD players can play this software using a  
conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.  
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
About XM  
About SIRIUS  
SIRIUS and the Sirius READY logo are registered trademarks of  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.  
About Neural – THX Surround  
About XM Radio  
XM is North America’s number one satellite radio company, offering  
an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in  
premier sports, news, talk radio, comedy, children’s and  
entertainment programming, broadcast in superior digital audio  
quality coast to coast. For more information, or to subscribe, U.S.  
customers visit xmradio.com or call XM Listener Care at 1-800-  
XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346); Canadian customers visit xmradio.ca or  
call XM Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677).  
®
XM Ready Legal  
XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and  
Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM service. It  
is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer,  
hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or  
software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM satellite  
Radio System. Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including  
a one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming  
subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are  
indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio  
receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (U.S. residents) and 1-877-  
GETXMSR (Canadian residents). XM service only available in the 48  
contiguous United States. ©2008 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights  
reserved.  
®
Neural-THX Surround is taking surround sound to the next level. This  
revolutionary new technology delivers the rich envelopment and  
discrete image detail of surround sound in a format that is fully  
compatible with stereo from various content sources. Neural-THX  
Surround enables 5.1, 6.1 and 7.1-channel support for gaming, movies  
and digital music. By unmasking the audio details, typically lost by  
other playback modes, audiences will experience the deep ambience  
and subtle details of movies, music and games.  
®
Neural-THX Digital Music™ is a new surround mode specifically  
designed to enhance the playback of compressed digital music content.  
It provides listeners with an expanded sound stage and clean surround  
experience, even with compressed audio sources such as MP3s and  
Internet streams.  
Neural-THX Surround has been chosen as the official surround sound  
format for XM Satellite Radio’s “XM HD Surround,” TV sports  
broadcasting, 7.1 games, Music Direct Internet streaming as well as  
leading FM/HD radio stations worldwide. And with this technology  
being used by sound designers during content creation, as well as  
embedded into playback devices, Neural-THX Surround promises a  
listening experience that is true to the original mix.  
For additional information, please visit www.neuralsurround.com.  
This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio  
Corporation and THX Ltd. PIONEER hereby grants the user a non-  
exclusive, non-transferable, limited right of use to this product under  
USA and foreign patent, patent pending and other technology or  
trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural  
Surround”, “Neural Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and  
logos owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a trademark of THX  
Ltd., which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
®
XM Ready Subscription  
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, inserted the  
XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock to your XM  
®
Ready audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to  
subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three  
places to find your eight character XM Radio ID: On the XM Mini-  
Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record  
the Radio ID below for reference.  
Note: The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.  
Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at  
http://activate.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346).  
Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada online at  
https://activate.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677).  
You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the  
satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes  
10-15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep  
your XM Ready audio system on for up to an hour. When you can  
access the full lineup on your XM Ready audio system you are done.  
®
XM Ready is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. The  
®
XM name and related logo are registered trademarks of XM Satellite  
Radio Inc. All rights reserved.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Listening modes with different input signal formats  
The following charts outline the listening modes available with different input signal formats, depending on the  
surround back channel processing and decoding method you have selected.  
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats  
SBch Processing  
Input signal format  
Standard  
Auto Surround  
SBch Processing  
ON/AUTO  
Dolby Digital Plus  
Dolby TrueHD  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC  
2 Pro Logic llx GAME  
Stereo playback  
(Automatically selects  
6.1/7.1 channel  
decoding)  
a
2 PRO LOGIC  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
DTS-HD  
Stereo playback  
As above  
DTS-EXPRESS  
Dolby Digital Surround  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC  
2 Pro Logic llx GAME  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
a
2 PRO LOGIC  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Neo:6 MUSIC  
DTS Surround  
SACD  
As above  
As above  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
XM HD Surround  
XM Radio  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC  
2 Pro Logic llx GAME  
2 PRO LOGIC  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Neo:6 MUSIC  
XM HD Surround  
Other stereo sources  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC  
2 Pro Logic llx GAME  
Stereo playback  
a
2 PRO LOGIC  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Neo:6 MUSIC  
b
Neural THX  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
SBch Processing  
SBch Processing  
Input signal format  
Standard  
Auto Surround  
Dolby Digital Plus  
Dolby TrueHD  
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC  
2 Pro Logic ll GAME  
2 PRO LOGIC  
Stereo playback  
c
OFF  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
DTS-HD  
Stereo playback  
As above  
DTS-EXPRESS  
Dolby Digital Surround  
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC  
2 Pro Logic ll GAME  
2 PRO LOGIC  
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Neo:6 MUSIC  
DTS Surround  
SACD  
As above  
As above  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
XM HD Surround  
XM Radio  
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC  
2 Pro Logic ll GAME  
2 PRO LOGIC  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Neo:6 MUSIC  
XM HD Surround  
Other stereo sources  
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC  
2 Pro Logic ll GAME  
Stereo playback  
a
2 PRO LOGIC  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Neo:6 MUSIC  
b
Neural THX  
a.No sound is output from the surround back speakers when 2 Pro Logic is selected.  
b.This is only selectable when the input signal is an analog or PCM signal.  
c.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Multichannel signal formats  
SBch Processing  
Input signal format  
Standard  
Auto Surround  
SBch Processing  
ON  
Dolby Digital Plus  
Dolby TrueHD  
DTS-HD  
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
(7.1 channel decoding  
used for all sources)  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
WMA9 Pro  
PCM  
(6.1/7.1 channel)  
Dolby Digital Plus  
Dolby TrueHD  
(5.1 channel)  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX  
a
a
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC  
DTS-EXPRESS  
DTS-HD  
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
(5.1 channel)  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX  
(6.1 channel flagged)  
a
a
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC  
DTS-ES  
(6.1 channel sources/  
6.1 channel flagged)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS+Neo:6  
a
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC  
DTS and DTS 96/24  
DTS+Neo:6  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
a
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
DTS+2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC  
Dolby Digital  
WMA9 Pro  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX  
a
a
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
PCM  
2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
SACD  
As above  
As above  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
SBch Processing  
Input signal format  
Standard  
Auto Surround  
SBch Processing  
AUTO  
Dolby Digital Plus  
Dolby TrueHD  
DTS-HD  
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
(Automatically selects  
6.1/7.1 channel  
decoding)  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
WMA9 Pro  
PCM  
(6.1/7.1 channel)  
Dolby Digital EX  
(6.1 channel flagged)  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX  
a
a
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1  
channel flagged)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
Other 5.1 channel sources  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
SACD  
As above  
Straight decoding  
As above  
As above  
Straight decoding  
As above  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
SBch Processing  
SACD  
b
OFF  
(5.1 channel)  
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources  
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.  
b.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Stream direct with different input signal formats  
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see  
Using Stream Direct on page 32) you have selected.  
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats  
Surround Back speaker(s)  
Connected  
Input signal format  
DIRECT  
PURE DIRECT  
Dolby Digital Surround  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
DTS Surround  
Other stereo sources  
Analog sources  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
As above  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)  
Not connected  
Dolby Digital Surround  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
DTS Surround  
Other stereo sources  
Analog sources  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
As above  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)  
Multichannel signal formats  
Surround Back speaker(s)  
Connected  
Input signal format  
DIRECT  
PURE DIRECT  
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)  
Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX  
a
a
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel  
flagged)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources  
All 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources  
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
Not connected  
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Specifications  
13  
Component Video Section  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 dB  
Frequency Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hz to 100 MHz  
Amplifier section  
Continuous average power output of 110 watts* per  
channel, min., at 8 ohms, from 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
with no more than 0.09 %** total harmonic  
distortion (front).  
HDMI Section  
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin x 3  
Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin (5 V, 100 mA)  
Continuous Power Output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω, 0.09 %)  
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W + 110 W  
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W  
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W + 110 W  
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W + 110 W  
FM Tuner Section  
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz  
Usable Sensitivity . . . . . . .Mono: 13.2 dBf, IHF (1.3 µV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 20.2 dBf  
Stereo: 38.6 dBf  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 73 dB (at 85 dBf)  
Stereo: 70 dB (at 85 dBf)  
Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stereo: 0.5 % (1 kHz)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 dB (400 kHz)  
Stereo Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 dB (1 kHz)  
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz to 15 kHz 1 dB  
Antenna Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω unbalanced  
Continuous Power Output (1 kHz, 6 Ω, 1.0 %)  
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W  
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W  
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W  
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W + 150 W  
Related Power Output (1 kHz, 8 Ω, 0.05 %)  
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 W per channel  
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 W  
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 W per channel  
AM Tuner Section  
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 kHz to 1 700 kHz  
Sensitivity (IHF, Loop antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 µV/m  
Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 dB  
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna  
Total harmonic distortion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.09 %  
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 110 W, 8 Ω)  
* Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commission’s  
Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for Amplifiers  
** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer  
Miscellaneous  
Power Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 W  
In standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.6 W (HDMI Control OFF)  
0.75 W (HDMI Control ON)  
Audio Section  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 mV/47 kΩ  
Frequency Response (LINE). . . . . . . 5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
Dimensions . . . . . .420 (W) mm x 173 (H) mm x 433 (D) mm  
(16 9/16 (W) in. x 6 13/16 (H) in. x 17 1/16 (D) in.)  
Weight (without package). . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3 kg (29 lbs 6 oz)  
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 mV/2.2 kΩ  
Tone Control  
Furnished Parts  
BASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 dB (100 Hz)  
TREBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 dB (10 kHz)  
LOUDNESS. . . . . . . . . . . . +4 dB/+2 dB (100 Hz/10 kHz)  
(at volume position –40 dB)  
Setup microphone (for Auto MCACC setup). . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Remote control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
These operating instructions  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)  
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio [EIA, at 1 W (1 kHz)]  
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 dB  
Composite Video Section  
Note  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 dB  
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 10 MHz  
• Specifications and the design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice, due to improvements.  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Cleaning the unit  
13  
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and  
dirt.  
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth  
dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six  
times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe  
again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or  
cleansers.  
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or  
other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will  
corrode the surface.  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime  
Used wisely, your new sound equipment will  
provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since  
hearing damage from loud noise is often  
undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer  
and the Electronic Industries Association’s  
Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid  
prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of  
sound levels is included for your protection.  
Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit  
you’ve just purchased is only the start of your  
musical enjoyment. Now it’s time to consider how  
you can maximize the fun and excitement your  
equipment offers. This manufacturer and the  
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer  
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of  
your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that  
lets the sound come through loud and clear without  
annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly,  
without affecting your sensitive hearing.  
Decibel  
Level Example  
30 Quiet library, soft whispers  
40 Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic  
50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office  
60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine  
70 Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant  
80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock  
at two feet.  
Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing  
“comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound.  
So what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and  
harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by  
setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your  
hearing adapts.  
THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS  
UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE  
90 Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower  
100 Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill  
120 Rock band concert in front of speakers,  
thunderclap  
To establish a safe level:  
• Start your volume control at a low setting.  
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it  
comfortably and clearly, and without distortion.  
140 Gunshot blast, jet plane  
180 Rocket launching pad  
Once you have established a comfortable sound  
level:  
• Set the dial and leave it there.  
Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation.  
Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent  
hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we  
want you listening for a lifetime.  
S001_En  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Should this product require service in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nearest Pioneer  
Authorized Independent Service Company, or if you wish to purchase replacement parts,  
operating instructions, service manuals, or accessories, please call the number shown  
below.  
1 – 8 0 0 – 4 2 1 – 1 4 0 4  
Please do not ship your product to Pioneer without first calling the Customer Support at the  
above listed number for assistance.  
Pioneer Electronics Service, Inc.  
P.O. BOX 1760, Long Beach,  
CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.  
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.  
Should this product require service in Canada, please contact a Pioneer Canadian  
Authorized Dealer to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Service Company in Canada.  
Alternatively, please contact the Customer Satisfaction Department at the following address:  
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.  
Customer Satisfaction Department  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2  
1-877-283-5901  
905-479-4411  
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.  
Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous adresser à un distributeur autorisé  
Pioneer du Canada pour obtenir le nom du Centre de Service Autorisé Pioneer le plus près  
de chez-vous. Vous pouvez aussi contacter le Service à la clientèle de Pioneer:  
Pioneer Électroniques du Canada, Inc.  
Service Clientèle  
300, Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2  
1-877-283-5901  
905-479-4411  
Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez vous reporter au feuillet sur la  
garantie restreinte qui accompagne le produit.  
S018_C_EF  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2008 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270  
Printed in  
<ARB7409-A>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Patton electronic Switch 378P User Manual
Pentax Camcorder W 20 User Manual
Philips Cassette Player AW 7500 User Manual
Philips Clock Radio AJL700 37B User Manual
Philips Clock Radio MG C105 17 User Manual
Philips Indoor Furnishings 37316 User Manual
Philips Portable DVD Player DVP3850K User Manual
Poulan Lawn Mower 177271 User Manual
ProForm Treadmill PFTL698060 User Manual
PYLE Audio Music Pedal PPDLHM User Manual